JP2021016612A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing increase in dissatisfaction and sluggishness because of increase in a variation display period while preventing continuous occurrence of an advantageous state in a short period.SOLUTION: Variable display resulting in a second advantageous state can determine a second variable display period at a higher ratio during a first period than during a second period, and can determine a first variable display period at a higher ratio during the second period than during the first period. While at least a display color of specific display is changed to a display color corresponding to a degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state in execution of a changing performance in the normal performance state, a display color of specific display is set to a common display color without any change regardless of a degree of expectation toward control to an advantageous state in execution of a changing performance in the specific performance state. A display color of specific display is displayed in a display color corresponding to a degree of expectation toward control to an advantageous state when shifting from the specific performance state to the normal performance state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-17

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that performs variable display and can control a plurality of advantageous states including a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.

Conventionally, as a gaming state after a big hit gaming state (advantageous state), it is controlled to a high-accuracy high-base state (special state) in which the variable display is frequently executed in the period until a predetermined variable display is executed. When a variable display that is a big hit is executed in the high accuracy and high base state, there is a gaming machine that executes a variable display having a short variable display period (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-168136

However, in Patent Document 1, since big hits can occur continuously within a short period of time, it is conceivable that the gambling property becomes excessively high. Therefore, it is conceivable to execute variable display with a long variable display period in a special state so that big hits do not occur continuously within a short period of time. In this case, dissatisfaction increases due to the long variable display period. There is a problem that the game is delayed.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and while preventing continuous occurrence of advantageous states in a short period of time, an increase or extension of dissatisfaction due to a long variable display period. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can also prevent.

The gaming machine described in means 1
The variable display is performed, and includes a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot A) that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot B) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state. A gaming machine that can be controlled to a plurality of advantageous states (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
The first period from the end of the advantageous state to the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times (for example, the period until the variable display is executed 50 times) and after the variable display of the predetermined number of times is executed. In a period including at least a second period (for example, a period during which the 51st to 100th or 51st to 150th variable display is executed), a special state (for example, high) in which the variable display is executed more frequently than the normal state. A game state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) that can be controlled to a high accuracy base state),
When the variable display is executed, the first variable display period (for example, 43 seconds or 53 seconds, which is the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α or super reach β shown in FIG. 8-6) and the first variable From among a plurality of different variable display periods including the second variable display period (for example, 180 seconds which is the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ shown in FIG. 8-6) which is a period longer than the display period. A variable display period determining means for determining the variable display period of 1 (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 8-17) and
At least, a notification effect for notifying that the second advantageous state is controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37, as part of the jackpot confirmation notification effect, is movable with the display of the rainbow-colored effect image display 179SG005K. The part that operates the body 179SG300) is the first timing during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (B), the timing during 20 seconds from the start of the variable display to the reach). The second timing after the first timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (A)), the timing within 23 seconds or 33 seconds from the reach during the variable display to the end of the variable display. ), And a notification effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display), which can be executed at a plurality of different timings.
With
The notification effect executing means has a higher ratio when the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed in the first period than when it is executed in the second period. When the variable display executed based on the fact that the notification effect can be executed at the first timing and is controlled to the second advantageous state is executed in the second period, the first period It is possible to execute the notification effect at the second timing at a higher rate than when it is executed in (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (C)), the 1st to 50th variable in the high base state. When the variable display result is jackpot B in the display, the movable body 179SG300 always operates from the first timing, while in the high base state, when the variable display result is jackpot B in the 51st and subsequent variable displays. , The part where the movable body 179SG300 always operates from the second timing),
The variable display period determining means is higher when the variable display executed based on being controlled in the second advantageous state is executed in the first period than when it is executed in the second period. The second variable display period can be determined by a ratio, and when the variable display executed based on the control of the second advantageous state is executed in the second period, in the first period. The first variable display period can be determined at a higher rate than when it is being executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-17, the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state. If the variable display result is jackpot B, the fluctuation pattern is always determined to be the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ by selecting the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, and it is variable in the 51st and subsequent variable displays in the high base state. When the display result is jackpot B, the fluctuation pattern is always determined to be one of normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β by selecting the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A).
further,
Specific display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that performs hold display or active display) capable of displaying specific display related to variable display on display means, and
It is provided with a change effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035) capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display.
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state (for example, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the hold display stage) changes up to the "red" stage). , The variable display result will always be a "big hit", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state in which a transition from the normal effect state can be performed and the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed). In that case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed),
The specific effect state is an effect state in which at least a part of the colors of the display target including the specific display displayed by the display means is displayed less than the normal effect state (for example, the effect). It is an effect of changing the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode by performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. It is a production that displays the number of colors to be performed with a smaller number of colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect is executed by the change effect executing means in the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is changed to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state. When the change effect is executed by the change effect means in the specific effect state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), the monochrome output process is performed, so even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, it is held regardless of the jackpot expectation. The display and active display are displayed in "white". On the other hand, in the normal effect state in which the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the expected degree according to the display mode change pattern),
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state (for example, in a monochrome mode in step 074AKS032). The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target returns to the normal number of colors, and the hold display or active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect is displayed in the changed display color, etc.),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an advantageous state from continuously occurring in a short period of time, and at the same time, to prevent an increase or delay in dissatisfaction due to a long variable display period. Further, the expectation degree notification by color can be suitably performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 2 is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
When the variable display of the second variable display period is executed in the first period, the notification effect executing means can execute a special notification effect that is not executed in the second period (for example, the effect control CPU 120). A part in which a full rotation reach effect as a special reach effect can be executed by executing the special reach effect pattern determination process shown in FIGS. 8-35)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the notification effect in the first period.

The gaming machine of the means 3 is the gaming machine according to the means 2.
In the special notification effect, the notification effect executing means can execute an effect using an aspect corresponding to the second advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-45, the image display device 5). The part that displays the rainbow-colored effect image 179SG005M)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes easy to understand that the second advantageous state is obtained, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to means 2 or means 3.
The notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect in a plurality of patterns including a first pattern and a second pattern different from the first pattern (for example, FIGS. 8-35 and 8-35). As shown in 36, the part where the special reach effect can be executed by any of the effect pattern α to the effect pattern γ),
Further, a limiting means for limiting that the special notification effect is repeatedly executed in the same pattern is further provided (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-35 and 8-36, the effect pattern of the special reach effect is executed last time. The part to be decided from excluding the production pattern that was done)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the special notification effect being repeatedly executed in the same pattern.

The gaming machine of the means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 4.
The notification effect executing means is executed based on being controlled to the first advantageous state when the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed in the first period. The notification effect can be executed at the first timing at a higher rate than when the variable display is executed in the first period (for example, the variable display is performed in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state). When the result is a big hit A, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (A), the movable body 179SG300 operates from the second timing during the execution period of the reach effect, and the variable display result becomes a big hit. On the other hand, when the variable display result becomes a large value B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, after the variable display starts, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (B). The part in which the movable body 179SG300 operates from the first timing during the period until the reach is reached and the variable display result is notified to be a big hit (big hit B)),
The variable display period determining means is based on being controlled to the first advantageous state when the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed in the first period. The second variable display period can be determined at a higher rate than when the variable display performed is performed in the first period (eg, high, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-17). If the variable display result is jackpot B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the base state, the fluctuation pattern is always determined as the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ by selecting the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, and the high base If the variable display result is jackpot A in the variable display from the 1st to the 50th time of the state, be sure to select the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A to set the fluctuation pattern to one of normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β. The part that determines the fluctuation pattern of
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the variable display executed based on the control of the second advantageous state is executed in the first period, the variable display of the second variable display period having a long period is easily executed. It is possible to prevent the interval between advantageous states from becoming excessively high in gambling, and it is easy to execute the notification effect at the first timing, which is early, so that the second variable display period has a long period. It is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered due to the delay caused by the execution of the variable display.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
It is possible to execute a special state rush effect (for example, a first high base state rush effect or a second high base state rush effect as an ending effect) that notifies that the special state is controlled when the advantageous state ends. A special state rush effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect process shown in FIGS. 8-38) and
When controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state is the second advantageous state before the end of the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game as shown in FIG. 8-44 (B)). In the 8th round of the above, the advantageous state type notification means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during the jackpot), which is a part for notifying that the jackpot game is a 16-round jackpot (big hit B)
With more
As the special state, the game state control means executes a first special state (for example, a time saving control over 100 variable displays and a probability variation control over 150 variable displays). It is possible to control a state) and a second special state (for example, a high-accuracy high-base state that executes time saving control and probability variation control over 150 variable displays), which is more advantageous than the first special state. When the first advantageous state ends, it is controlled to the first special state, and when the second advantageous state ends, it is controlled to the second special state (for example, in the jackpot end process shown by the CPU 103 in FIG. 8-19). If the jackpot type is jackpot A, the probability variation counter is set to "150" and the time reduction counter is set to "100", and if the jackpot type is jackpot B, the probability variation counter and the time reduction counter are set. The part where "150" is set),
The special state rush effect execution means is
When the first advantageous state ends, it is possible to execute a first special state rush effect (for example, a first high base state rush effect as an ending effect) that notifies that the first special state is controlled. A second special state rush effect (for example, an ending effect) that notifies that the second special state is controlled when the second advantageous state ends, and has a longer effect period than the first special state rush effect. It is possible to execute the second high base state rush effect) as
As the second special state rush effect, after starting the effect in the same manner as the first special state rush effect, a switching effect of switching to a notification that the second special state is controlled (for example, FIG. 8-39). As shown in (B), the movable body 179SG300 operates as a part of the second high base state rush effect after the first high base state rush effect is executed, so that the variable display number is controlled to the high base state. It is characterized in that a certain "100 times" display is updated to a "150 times" display).
According to this feature, when the advantageous second advantageous state ends, the second special state rush effect having a long effect period is executed at the end, so that the interval between the advantageous states becomes short and the gambling becomes excessive. It can be prevented from becoming expensive.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means (7) to (13). Conventionally, in a game machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-2224 becomes a specific display mode. , It becomes an advantageous state (big hit game state) which is advantageous for the player. For example, a gaming machine that is in a big hit game state opens a special electric accessory called a big winning opening or an attacker, and continuously provides a player with a state in which winning a game ball is extremely easy for a certain period of time. To do. In such a game machine, various kinds of effects are executed to notify the player of the expectation degree controlled in an advantageous state before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed.

As such a game machine, for example, there is a machine that reduces the number of colors used and executes an effect in a black-and-white mode.

However, since the number of colors was simply reduced, there was room for improvement in terms of improving the game entertainment. This was done in view of the above situation, and the purpose is to provide a game machine that can improve the game entertainment.

As a game machine of means 7, as a game machine according to another aspect for achieving the above object.
It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Specific display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that performs hold display or active display) capable of displaying specific display related to variable display on display means, and
It is provided with a change effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035) capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display.
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state (for example, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the hold display stage) changes up to the "red" stage). , The variable display result will always be a "big hit", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state in which a transition from the normal effect state can be performed and the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed). In that case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed),
The specific effect state is an effect state in which at least a part of the colors of the display target including the specific display displayed by the display means is displayed less than the normal effect state (for example, the effect). It is an effect of changing the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode by performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. It is a production that displays the number of colors to be performed with a smaller number of colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect is executed by the change effect executing means in the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is changed to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state. When the change effect is executed by the change effect means in the specific effect state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), the monochrome output process is performed, so even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, it is held regardless of the jackpot expectation. The display and active display are displayed in "white". On the other hand, in the normal effect state in which the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the expected degree according to the display mode change pattern),
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state (for example, in a monochrome mode in step 074AKS032). The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target returns to the normal number of colors, and the hold display or active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect is displayed in the changed display color, etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, the expectation degree notification by color can be preferably performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 8 is the gaming machine according to the means 7.
The common display color is a display color that is displayed at a high rate before the change effect is executed in the normal effect state and the specific effect state (for example, it is displayed in "white").
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the expectation degree notification by color can be preferably performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 7 to the means 8.
Further equipped with a light emitting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9) capable of emitting light according to the effect being executed,
In the specific effect state, the light emitting means emits light with a number of colors corresponding to the number of colors to be displayed displayed by the display means (for example, in step 074AKS056, it corresponds to the number of colors of an image in a monochrome mode. (For example, the number of colors used),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it stand out that it is in a specific production state, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of the means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 7 to the means 9.
In the specific effect state, the number of colors of the specific display and the background image displayed by the display means is reduced as compared with the normal effect state (for example, in the process of step 074AKS056, the monochrome effect is executed. By starting (monochrome output processing), the target image in monochrome mode such as hold display, active display, background image, etc. is displayed in monochrome mode),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it stand out that it is in a specific production state, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of the means 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 7 to the means 10.
In the specific effect state, the effect sound output in the normal effect state can be silently controlled, while when the change effect is executed in the specific effect state, the change effect is started. (For example, the output sound is muted during the specific effect state, and only the execution start sound is output and the success sound or the failure sound is not output for the change effect).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it stand out that it is in a specific effect state, and it is possible to recognize the start of execution of the change effect.

The gaming machine of the means 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 7 to the means 11.
When the change effect is executed in the specific effect state and the display color of the specific display changes when the specific effect state is changed to the normal effect state, the specific display is displayed at the timing of the change. Outputs a change notification sound that notifies that the display color of is changed (for example, a success sound or a failure sound is output when the monochrome effect ends).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the specific display has changed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of the means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 7 to the means 12.
The number of colors of special information that does not suggest the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state is not reduced even in the specific effect state (for example, the main board 11 is not an image that is drawn and displayed according to the degree of expectation). The image for displaying the information by the command etc. sent from the side of is not in monochrome mode, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the content suggested by the special information can be recognized even in the specific production state, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a large hit variation pattern determination table A, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table B, and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is a figure. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the received command buffer at the time of a moving prize. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of display contents. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the lookahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern of the lookahead notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination processing in the rear variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. is there. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect decision processing in front part variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided, and (B) is the figure which shows the execution of the setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect in front variable display in the case, (C) is the figure which shows the effect pattern of the character effect and timer effect which is executed as suggestion effect in front variable display. (D) is a figure which shows the jackpot expectation degree of a character effect and a timer effect, and the execution expectation degree of a setting suggestion effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and (C) shows the content of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a figure. It is a figure which shows the effect execution period in the variable display of super reach in a low base state. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display suggestion effect decision processing in high base. (A) is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the variable display suggestion effect in high base, and (B) is a figure which shows the effect content of each effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the special reach effect pattern determination process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of a special reach production, and the figure which shows the production content of each production pattern. (A) is a timing chart when a variable display is executed with a fluctuation pattern of super reach α or super reach β in a high base state and a big hit is obtained, and (B) is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ in a high base state. It is a timing chart when the variable display is executed and a big hit is obtained, and (C) is a figure which shows the ratio of the timing when the probability variation big hit B is notified in the variable display of a high base state. It is a flowchart which shows the ending effect processing. (A) is a timing chart of the ending effect of the probabilistic jackpot A at the end of the jackpot game, and (B) is a timing chart of the ending effect of the probabilistic jackpot B at the end of the jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach in a low base state. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach in a low base state. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach in a low base state. It is a figure which shows the production mode in the jackpot game of jackpot A. It is a figure which shows the production mode in the jackpot game of jackpot B. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach in a high base state. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach in a high base state. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio as the suggestion effect in front variable display of a character effect and a timer effect in a modification, and the execution expectation degree of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the hold memory display and the effect image in the modification. It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion effect in the variable display of a normal reach, a non-reach without shortening, and a non-shortening non-reach in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing in the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern determination table according to the variable display result. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the command buffer at the time of a start winning. It is explanatory drawing explaining an example of the effect control command received on the effect control board side, and the processing content which is executed in the command analysis process according to the received effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lookahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the active display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the display mode change pattern determination table when the number of hold is 4. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the display mode change pattern determination table when the number of hold is 4. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the display mode change pattern determination table when the number of hold is 3. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the display mode change pattern determination table when the number of hold is 3. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the display mode change pattern determination table when the number of hold is 2. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a monochrome effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination example of whether or not the monochrome production is executed. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the end timing of a monochrome production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the monochrome effect and the change effect are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the monochrome effect and the change effect are executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the lookahead notice setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting process such as a monochrome effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode change pattern determination table and the active display change timing determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change effect setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect operation when the monochrome effect and the change effect are executed. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the lookahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern of the lookahead notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination processing in the rear variable display. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio and the effect pattern of the effect to execute as a suggestion effect in the rear variable display. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect decision processing in front part variable display. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as a suggestion effect, the effect pattern, and the execution expectation degree in the front variable display. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect pattern of a character effect, the determination rate of the effect pattern of a timer effect, and the content of each effect pattern of a timer effect. It is a figure which shows the effect execution period in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio as the suggestion effect in front variable display of a character effect and a timer effect in a modification, and the execution expectation degree of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the hold memory display and the effect image in the modification. It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion effect in the variable display of a normal reach, a non-reach without shortening, and a non-shortening non-reach in a modification.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door (for special electric accessory) is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high accuracy state and the low base state are also called the high accuracy low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern is in the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss" The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It includes an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp on / off mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, see See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is used by using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Includes processing to make settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this process during opening of the big hit, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the large winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like are used as the basis for the large winning opening. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. Ends processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). In addition, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided receive flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead advance notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to, for example, the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 179SG)
Next, the game machine in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-46.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 179SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 179SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 179SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 179SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 179SG003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 179SG003a, and when the glass door frame 179SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 179SG003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the game machine frame 179SG003 and the glass can be opened by players other than the clerk. The door frame 179SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 179SG002L is a game area in which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 179SG002R is the left game area 179SG002L by the operation of the ball hitting operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 179SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 179SG002L, and in the right game area 179SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 179SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 179SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning hole formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 179SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 179SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 179SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 179SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

Further, a first reserved storage display area 179SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 179SG005U are set at two positions on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first reserved storage display area 179SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 179SG005U, a reserved storage display for identifiablely displaying the reserved storage number (special figure reserved storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

A movable body 179SG300 is provided at an upper position of the image display device 5. The movable body 170SG300 is driven by a movable body motor 179SG301 (see FIG. 8-2) connected to the effect control board 12, and has a standby position shown in FIG. 8-1 and a front position (effect position) of the image display device 5. ) (See Fig. 8-44).

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 179SG of the present embodiment is housed in a substrate case 179SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 179SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 179SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 179SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 179SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the set value change state in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ).

The setting switching main body portion provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 179SG051 and the setting changeover switch 179SG052, is housed in the board case 179SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 179SG051 and the setting changeover switch 179SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case 179SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 179SG201.

Since the board case 179SG201 having the lock switch 179SG051 and the setting changeover switch 179SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 179SG003 in the closed state, and the predetermined door key is pressed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 179SG003. Further, since the lock switch 179SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 179SG051. Further, the lock switch 179SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

Further, in the board case 179SG201, a display monitor 179SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 179SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 179SG201. That is, the display monitor 179SG029 is arranged in front of the board case 179SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 179SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 179SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 179SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 179SG004A capable of variable display of 1 special figure, 2nd special symbol display device 179SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st hold display capable of displaying 1st hold storage number Instrument 179SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 179SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 179SG020 capable of executing variable display of the normal symbol, normal symbol hold indicator 179SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 179SG131 that can display the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 179SG002R. A game information display unit 179SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 179SG132 that lights up, a probability change lamp 179SG133 that lights up in the probability change state, and a time reduction lamp 179SG134 that lights up in the high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

The first special symbol display device 179SG004A and the second special symbol display device 179SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 179SG004A and the second special symbol display device 179SG004B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is off or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

Regarding the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 179SG004A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 179SG004B is variablely displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The result and derivation can be displayed.

In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 179SG004A and the second special symbol display device 179SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 179SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 179SG004B may overlap.

In the first hold indicator 179SG025A and the second hold indicator 179SG025B, LEDs of four segments are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold indicator 179SG025A and second hold indicator 179SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of the present embodiment) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In part 179SG, the lights are turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, for example, when there is one 1st special figure hold memory and 2 2nd special figure hold memories (only the LED at the left end of the 1st hold indicator 179SG025A is lit and the 2nd hold is on. (When the two LEDs on the left of the display 179SG25B are lit), the first special figure hold is held after the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. A variable display based on memory is executed.

Further, the round display 179SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 179SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

FIG. 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 179SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 179SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 179SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 179SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 179SG004B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number in order to display the special figure reserved storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, etc.) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating a determination result of whether the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the feature unit 179SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-6 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". Further, 1 variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a “small hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ is executed. is there. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, four or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, with respect to the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are shown. Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In this feature unit 179SG, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. Therefore, the big hit expectation is set to be high, so that the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Further, in the feature unit 179SG, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ is provided only when the variable display result is a big hit, and the special figure fluctuation time is set to be the longest. There is.

In addition, in this feature unit 179SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided for determining these variation pattern types. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value of the above, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, and the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-11, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), and FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -8 (A) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table and the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, an outlier variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

8-7 (A) and 8-7 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and set. Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different depending on each set value (for example, setting). If the value is 1, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is set to be constant (for example, 5 times). May be good.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, paying attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and the "small hit" in each display result judgment table, the display result for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is in the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6, and 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value) of 32767 to 33094. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of the hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set based on the hit determination value 1020. The judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the continuous numerical range of 1 is based on the hit judgment value 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value (common). The variable display result is judged by using the judgment value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit judgment value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8-7 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 179SG004A or the second special symbol display device 179SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 179SG004A or the second special symbol display device 179SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, a total of 6 set values of 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-8 (A) and 8-8 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 8-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 8-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second starting winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 8-9. In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, jackpot A and jackpot B are set as the jackpot type, in which the time saving control and the high accuracy control are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state to shift to the high accuracy high base state. There is. It should be noted that the feature unit 179SG exemplifies a mode in which a jackpot A and a jackpot B (probability variation jackpot) drink, in which high accuracy control is always executed after the end of the jackpot game, are set as the jackpot type. Is not limited to this, and as the jackpot type, a jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) in which high-accuracy control is not executed after the end of the jackpot game may be set.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed seven times (so-called 7 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 16 times (so-called 16 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" becomes the big hit game state before the 100 special figure games are executed or the 100 special figure games are executed. It ends by. The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit B" becomes the big hit game state before the 150 special figure games are executed or the 150 special figure games are executed. It ends by.

The probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot game state by "big hit A" and the probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot game state by "big hit B" are executed 150 times in the special figure game. That is, or the game ends when the jackpot game state is reached before the 150 special figure games are executed.

That is, in the main feature unit 179SG, after the end of the big hit gaming state by the "big hit A", the gaming state is first controlled to the high accuracy and high base state. Then, if the variable display result is not a big hit during the 100 special figure games (100 variable displays) in the high accuracy and high base state, the game state is controlled to the low accuracy and high base state. If the variable display result is not a big hit during the 50 special figure games (50 variable displays) in the low accuracy and high base state, the game state is controlled to the low accuracy and low base state. On the other hand, after the end of the big hit gaming state by the "big hit B", the gaming state is first controlled to the high accuracy and high base state. Then, if the variable display result does not become a big hit during the 150 special figure games (150 variable displays) in the high accuracy and high base state, the game state is controlled to the low accuracy and low base state.

In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpots A to C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 199 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to the jackpot A. 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. That is, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening (game). When the winning opening where the ball wins is the second starting winning opening, the rate at which the jackpot B is determined as the jackpot type is set higher than when the winning opening where the game ball wins is the first starting winning opening. On the other hand, the jackpot type is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". The jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance and the deviation pattern judgment table used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result is "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table includes 1 to 50 special figure games in the high base state (up to 50 times in the high base state). (Variable display), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A used except when the jackpot type is jackpot B, and the special figure game 1 to 50 times in the high base state (variable display up to 50 times in the high base state). In the above, a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, which is used when the jackpot type is jackpot B, is provided in advance, and these jackpot fluctuation pattern determination tables include normal reach jackpot fluctuation patterns (PB1-1). For each fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), and super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-4), for fluctuation pattern determination A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 can take.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 200 are the fluctuation patterns (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot. It is assigned, and 201 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). ..

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 1 to 997 are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-4). ) Is assigned. That is, in this feature unit 179SG, when the jackpot type is jackpot B in 1 to 50 special figure games in the high base state (variable display up to 50 times in the high base state), the special figure fluctuation time is always the longest. The variable display is set to be executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) of the long super reach γ.

In this feature unit 179SG, when the jackpot type is jackpot B in 1 to 50 special figure games in the high base state (variable display up to 50 times in the high base state), the special figure fluctuation time is always the longest. Although the embodiment in which the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) of the long super reach γ is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is characterized by 1 to 50 times in a high base state. Even if the jackpot type is jackpot B in the game (variable display up to 50 times in the high base state), the fluctuation pattern of normal reach (PB1) is lower than the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (PB1-4). -1), a case where the variable display is executed according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α (PB1-2) and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β (PB1-3) may be provided. Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (PB1-4) even when the jackpot type is jackpot B in the special figure game of 1 to 50 times in the high base state (variable display up to 50 times in the high base state). ) May be used to execute the variable display.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, the variation pattern of small hits from 0 to 997 in the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 ( It is assigned to PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the small hit is 2 or more. Fluctuation pattern may be provided.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), 1 to 450 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are out of super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storage numbers), 1 to 1 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997. Up to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are out of super reach α. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 5 or more), 1 to 550 out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-reach. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), 1 to 550 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are non-reach deviation variations. It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) out of normal reach, and 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α. 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

As described above, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio for determining the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is set higher than the ratio for determining the super reach variation pattern. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. If each of the fluctuation patterns is assigned, that is, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined at a common determination ratio, so that the variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is not executed. It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced.

In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as the deviation pattern, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of the super reach β are completely the same between the set values. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α outlier and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of super reach β are between each set value. May differ by a small margin (for example, about 1%).

In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratios of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and the fluctuation of either non-reach and normal reach may be the same. Only the pattern determination rate may be the same.

The non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C), the variation is made by using the deviation pattern determination table that differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a form in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute the reach effect and which reach effect is to be executed for each determined fluctuation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect based on the special figure variation time of the variation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach effect is executed. You may decide whether to do it by lottery.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 179SG029 in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), the display monitor 179SG029 includes a first display unit 179SG029A, a second display unit 179SG029B, a third display unit 179SG029C, and a fourth display unit 179SG029D. The first display unit 179SG029A to the fifth display unit 179SG29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 179SG029A to the fifth display unit 179SG29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 179SG029 in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the areas not subject to the test in all the areas of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 at the time of testing the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (B) and 8-12 (C), the display monitor 179SG029 has a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states. Base L (real-time value during measurement), base 1 which is a base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in the first out 6000 balls in all game states, and base 1 in all game states. Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the third out 6000 balls in the all-game state. It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 179SG029 as a percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 179SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 179SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 179SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "bL." Of the base L. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 179SG029C and the fourth display unit 179SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 179SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 179SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 179SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 179SG029C and the fourth display unit 179SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 179SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 179SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 179SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 179SG029C and the fourth display unit 179SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 179SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 179SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 179SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 179SG029C and the fourth display unit 179SG029D.

In the display monitor 179SG029 of the present embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU103). For example, the main board 11 executes a control for switching the display of the display monitor 179SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5-second intervals. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 179SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 179SG029 is displayed in white, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When it is "2", each base value on the display monitor 179SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 179SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 179SG029 is displayed in green, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4". If it is "5", each base value on the display monitor 179SG029 is displayed in red, and if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", each base value on the display monitor 179SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the clerk of the game hall can specify the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 179SG029 without executing the setting value changing process described later by the CPU 103. ing.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 8-2 has an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, for effect control as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A). A data holding area 179SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 179SG190 shown in FIG. 8-13 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 179SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 179SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 179SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 179SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 179SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 179SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 179SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 179SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 179SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 179SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 179SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 179SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 179SG194A as shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 179SG194. The reception command buffer 179SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 179SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 179SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in the variable manner while being shifted upward one by one. It is designed to be cleared in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing that is executed when

Further, the start winning command buffer 179SG194A in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment has a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display in the look-ahead advance notice setting process (FIG. 8-21) described later. The storage area of the hold display flag in which is set is secured for each storage area (entry).

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the hold display notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process described later. As a result, when the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 179SG005D and the second hold storage display area 179SG005U, and the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided. Is "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (star)) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display of a special mode (for example, a square (◇) or a star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. By setting "3" (blue camera) or "4" (red camera) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode (for example, a blue or red camera), it is usually set. The hold storage display in a mode different from the display mode of is displayed in the first hold storage display area 179SG005D and the second hold storage display area 179SG005U, and there is a possibility that the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display will be a big hit. It is foretold that there is a high possibility of reaching and a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is likely to be executed.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 179SG194A. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 179SG194A. I will go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 179SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variation display that ended immediately before each time the variation display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display that starts are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variablely displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main process in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-14 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (179SGSa001). Then, the necessary initial settings are made (179SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (179SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (179SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 179SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (179SGSa003; Y, 179SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (179SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (179SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 179SGsa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (179SGSa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power failure (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) was set. (179SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (179SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 179SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (179SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (179SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (179SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set and the process proceeds to 179SGSa011 (179SGSa010). When the clear switch is OFF (179SGSa008; N), 179SGSa010 is not executed and the process proceeds to 179SGSa011. move on.

In 179SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 179SG051 is ON (179SGSa011). When the lock switch 179SG051 is ON (179SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 179SG090 is ON (179SGSa012). When the release sensor 179SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch 179SG051 ON and the game machine frame 179SG003 open (179SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not (179SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (179SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (179SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to 179SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is set. If is not set (179SGSa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (179SGSa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 179SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (179SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 179SG029. Next, every time the setting changeover switch 179SG052 is operated, the setting value is updated and displayed on the display monitor 179SG029. Then, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 179SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 based on the lock switch 179SG051 being turned off, and the setting value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 can be specified. The command is output to the effect control CPU 120.

Further, in the set value confirmation process (179SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 179SG029. Then, based on the fact that the lock switch 179SG051 is turned off, the display of the set value on the display monitor 179SG029 may be terminated.

When the lock switch 179SG051 is OFF (179SGSa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (179SGSa012; N) in 179SGSa011, the process proceeds to 179SGSa013d without executing the processes of 179SGSa013a to 179SGSa013c.

In 179SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (179SGSa009) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time ( 179SGSa013d). When the RAM clear flag is set (179SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (179SGSa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to 179SGSa014. When the RAM clear flag is not set (179SGSa013d; N), the RAM clear process (179SGSa013e) Proceed to 179SGSa014 without executing.

In the RAM clear process (179SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes a process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the set value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). .. That is, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 179SGSa001 to 179SGSa013e and 179SGSa017 to 179SGSa021 described later, if there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address in which the set value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except the dress you are wearing.

In 179SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set again (179SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (179SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 179SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (179SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Performs recovery processing to return to the state of (179SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 179SGSa028. (179SGSa016).

Further, in 179SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (179SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (179SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 179SG051 is ON (179SGSa018) and whether or not the release sensor 179SG090 is ON (179SGSa019).

When the lock switch 179SG051 is ON (179SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 179SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 179SG003 is opened and the lock switch 179SG051 is turned on, the pachinko game is operated while operating the clear switch. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (179SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (179SGSa021). Then, the above-mentioned processes of 179SGSa009 to 179SGSa016 are executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (179SGSa017; N), the lock switch 179SG051 is OFF (179SGSa018; N), and the release sensor 179SG090 is OFF (179SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 179SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (179SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (179SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting blinking of all segments constituting the display monitor 179SG029. (179SGSa024).

After executing 179SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (179SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (179SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timer-out (179SGsa026; N), the processes of 179SGsa025 and 179SGsa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timer-out (179SGsa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 179SG029. Ends blinking (179SGSa027) and proceeds to 179SGSa028.

In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, an example is exemplified in which all the segments constituting the display monitor 179SG029 are blinked over the period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 179SG029 may be blinked at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 179SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in 179SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (179SGSa028) that initially sets the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Set the built-in CTC register (179SGSa029) and allow interrupts (179SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in 179SGSa031, the CPU 103 refers to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure during the setting change described later. And sends an error specification command according to the abnormality of the set value (179SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (179SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (179SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (179SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer is not timered out (179SGSa034; N), the processes of 179SGsa033 and 179SGSa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer is timered out (179SGSa034; Y), a setting value error error occurs. 1st display unit 179SG029A, 2nd display unit 179SG029B, 3rd display unit 179SG029C, 4th display unit 179SG029D, which constitute the display monitor 179SG029, as notification (error notification) that the power is restored from the occurrence or setting change. "E." is displayed in each of the above (179SGSa035).

Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 179SG004A and the second special symbol display device 179SG004B (179SGSa036), and plays a game via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 179SGSa032 (179SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the process of 179SGSa032-179SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall), thereby displaying the display monitor 179SG029. , The first special symbol display device 179SG004A and the second special symbol display device 179SG004B execute notification of the occurrence of an error.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment has the display monitor 179SG029, the first display monitor 179SG029, when it recovers from an abnormal set value or a power failure during the change of the set value. Since the special symbol display device 179SG004A and the second special symbol display device 179SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can generate an error or set a value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power failure during the change has been restored. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure during the change of the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-14, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 179SGSa008 (179SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 179SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process (179SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 179SGSa008 (179SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 179SGSa021 but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 179SGSa014 (179SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

FIG. 8-15 is a flowchart showing a start winning determination process (S101) executed by the CPU 103 in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (179SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (179SGS101; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (179SGS101; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (179SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the first special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in 179SGS102 (179SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1" (179SGS103). ).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 179SGS101 (179SGS101; N) or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in 179SGS102 (179SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is ON based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the player (179SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (179SGS104; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (179SGS104; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (179SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in 179SGS105 (179SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (179SGS106). ).

After executing any of the processes of 179SGS103 and 179SGS106, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (179SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (179SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is a stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the processing of 179SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (179SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (179SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), while when the start port buffer value is "2". , Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown).

Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of 179SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random value values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol and the variable display time.

Following the processing of the 179SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting port winning designation command according to the starting port buffer value is performed (179SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is used. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

Following the processing of 179SGS111, the winning random number value determination processing is executed (179SGS112). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (179SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

After executing the process of 179SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (179SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y at 179 SGS 114), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (179 SGS 115), and then the process proceeds to 179 SGS 104. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 179 SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (S116), and then the start winning process is performed. finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 8-16 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 179 SGS 112 of FIG. 8-15 as the winning random number value determination process. In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set by the special symbol normal process (S110 in FIG. 5). It is determined whether or not to control the big hit game state as "big hit", and whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 5), the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing of the 179SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result, whether or not it is determined that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result, and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. Determines whether or not is in the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. It is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this judgment result. Then, the hold display notice effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120 or the like, as will be described later.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, a game control flag setting unit (not shown), thereby pachinko. The current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 is specified (179SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of 179SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 is selected and set (179SGS122). At this time, if the start port buffer value is 1, the CPU 103 sets the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), and if the start port buffer value is 2, FIG. 8-7. The display result determination table for the second special figure shown in (B) may be set.

After that, referring to the numerical range of the jackpot (judgment range of the jackpot) according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the set display result determination table, the special figure extracted in 179SGS109 of FIG. 8-15. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is within the jackpot determination range (179SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the display result determination table selected by the processing of 179SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each determination value. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing them one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as “big hit”.

If it is determined by the 179SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved during variable display (179SGS123; N), it is set to the pachinko game machine 1 in the set display result determination table. With reference to the numerical range of small hits (judgment range of small hits) according to the set value, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by 179SGS109 in FIG. 8-15 is It is determined whether or not it is within the small hit determination range (179SGS124). In the small hit judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the display result judgment table selected by the processing of 179SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and each judgment value. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing with and one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the small hit judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR1 and the minimum value or the maximum value of the small hit judgment range. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the small hit determination range by comparing with. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range, it can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as “small hit”.

When it is determined by the 179SGS124 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the small hit does not occur at the time of variable display (179SGS124; N), the variable display result becomes "missing". The transmission setting of the symbol designation command is executed (179SGS125), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (179SGS126). If the time reduction flag is not set (179SGS126; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set (179SGS127), and if the time reduction flag is set (179SGS126; Y), the deviation pattern is changed. Judgment table D is selected and set (179SGS128).

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), the deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (D), the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed. is there.

In addition, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation pattern determination table D, the deviation used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4. The variation pattern determination table B for deviation and the variation pattern determination table C for deviation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. 8-11, these are out of alignment. Of the fluctuation pattern judgment tables A to C, in the deviation pattern judgment table A, a value from 0 to 450 within the range that the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern judgment can take is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern. In the deviation pattern determination tables B and C, a value exceeding 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, values from 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take.

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern (variation category) using the deviation pattern determination table A in the 179SGS137 described later, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always performed even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Since it is a non-reach or super reach variation pattern, the determination at the time of starting winning is made by using the deviation pattern determination table A.

As shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), when the 179 SGS123 determines that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot during variable display (179SGS123; Y), the jackpot type determination The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for (179SGS130). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the jackpot type determined in the 179 SGS 130 is executed (179SG131), and whether or not the time saving flag is set and whether or not the hold memory is the hold memory of the second special figure. (179SGS132, 179SGS133). Whether or not the hold memory is the hold memory of the second special figure may be determined by the start port buffer value set in the process of 179 SGS 103 or 179 SGS 106. When the time saving flag is set and the hold memory is the hold memory of the second special figure (179 SGS132; Y and 179 SGS133; Y), the variable display of the hold memory is further variable within the 50th time in the high base state. It is determined whether or not the display is displayed (179SGS134). Whether or not the variable display is performed within the 50th time in the high base state depends on the value of the time saving state variable display count counter described later and the number of the reserved memory in the second special figure reserved storage unit. It may be judged by the above.

For example, when the hold storage is the first hold storage in the second special figure hold storage unit, whether or not the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the time reduction count state variable display count counter is "50" or less. If the hold storage is the second hold storage in the second special figure hold storage unit, is the value obtained by adding 2 to the value of the time reduction count state variable display count counter is "50" or less? When it is determined whether or not the hold memory is the third hold memory in the second special figure hold storage unit, the value obtained by adding 3 to the value of the time reduction count state variable display count counter is "50" or less. If it is determined whether or not there is, and the reserved memory is the fourth reserved memory in the second special figure reserved storage unit, the value obtained by adding 4 to the value of the time saving number state variable display number counter is "50". It may be determined whether or not it is as follows.

When the variable display of the hold storage is the variable display within the 50th time in the high base state (179SGS134; Y), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern. (179SG135).

Further, when the time saving flag is not set (179SGS132; N), etc., when the hold memory is the hold memory of the second special figure (179SGS133; N), the variable display of the hold memory is the 51st time in the high base state. In the case of the subsequent variable display (179SGS134; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and set as the table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (179SGS136).

If it is determined by the 179SGS124 that the small hit is within the small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that the small hit is achieved during variable display (179SGS124; Y), a symbol designation command corresponding to the small hit type is transmitted. While executing the setting (179SGS129a), a small hit variation pattern determination table is selected and set as a table for determining the small hit variation pattern (179SGS129b).

After executing any of the processes of 179SGS127, 179SGS128, 179SGS129b, 179SGS135, and 179SGS136, the random number value MR3 is included by using the set fluctuation pattern determination table and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination. The variation category according to the range of the determination values to be determined is determined (179SGS137). In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the "non-reach" is common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Variable categories that are variable display modes, variable categories that are variable display modes of "super reach", and "others" that are variable display modes other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hits) It suffices if a variable category is provided and it can be determined whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 179SGS137 to the effect control board 12 (179SGS138), the random number value determination processing at the time of winning is terminated.

FIG. 8-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S111 of FIG. 5 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 8-17, the CPU 103 is first set with a time saving state variable display count counter indicating the number of special figure games (variable display) after being controlled to the high base state (time saving state). Whether or not it is determined (179SGS141). The fact that the time-saving state variable display count counter is set means that any numerical value including 0 is set in the time-saving state variable display count counter. When the time saving state variable display count counter is set (179SGS141; Y), the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is incremented by +1 to proceed to 179SGS143 (179SGS142). If the time reduction state variable display count counter is not set (179SGS141; N), the process proceeds to 179SGS143 without executing the process of 179SGS142.

In the 179SGS143, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set. Then, if the jackpot flag is set (179SGS143; Y), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot B (179SGS144). When the jackpot type is jackpot B (179SGS144; Y), whether or not the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is any of 1 to 50, that is, the variable display to be executed is controlled to the high base state. It is determined whether or not the variable display is the 1st to 50th times since the display is performed (179SGS145). When the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is any one of 1 to 50 (179SGS145; Y), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern. (179SGS146), proceed to 179SGS155.

When the jackpot type is jackpot A (179SGS144) or when the value of the time saving state variable display count counter is 51 or more (179SGS145; N), the jackpot variation is used as a table to be used for determining the jackpot variation pattern. The pattern determination table A is selected and set (179SGS147), and the process proceeds to 179SGS155.

When the jackpot flag is not set in 179SGS143 (179SGS143; N), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set to determine whether or not the time saving control is in progress (179SGS148). Then, if the time saving flag is set (179SGS148; Y), the deviation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types, and the process proceeds to 179SGS155. (179SGS149).

On the other hand, when the time saving flag is not set (179SGS148; N), the total number of reserved storages is specified, and it is determined whether or not the specified total number of reserved storages is 2 or more (179SGS150).

When the specified total number of reserved storages is 1 or less (179SGS150; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types. Proceed to 179 SGS 155 (179 SGS 151).

Further, when the specified total number of reserved storages is 2 or more (179SGS150; Y), it is further determined whether or not the total number of reserved storages is 5 or more (159SGS152).

When the total number of reserved storages is not 5 or more (179SGS152; N), the deviation pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table used for determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types, and the variation pattern is set to 179SGS155. Proceed (179SGS153).

When the total number of reserved storages is 5 or more (179SGS152; Y), the deviation pattern determination table C is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern to any of a plurality of types. Proceed to 179 SGS 155 (179 SGS 154).

Then, in the 179 SGS 155, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table or a loss variation pattern determination table based on numerical data indicating a variation pattern determination random number value MR3 stored in, for example, a variation random number buffer. The variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to.

When the jackpot flag is off, the variation pattern is determined by the process of 179SGS155 to determine whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach". That is, the process of the 179 SGS 155 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is "off".

After the fluctuation pattern is determined by the 179SGS155, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B according to the variable display special symbol designation buffer value. A setting is made to start the variable display of the special symbol so as to start any of the special diagram games using the second special symbol (179SGS156). As an example, if the variable display special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable display special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the processing of 179SGS156, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting variable display of the special symbol (179SGS157). For example, when the variable display special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result specification command, the first hold storage number notification command, etc., the setting data indicating the storage address (start address) in the ROM 101 of the first variable display start command table prepared in advance is sent to the transmission command buffer. Stores in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in. On the other hand, when the variable display special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives a game state designation command, a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, and a variable from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the display result specification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is stored in the buffer specified by the transmission command pointer. Store in the area.

After executing the process of 179SGS157, the special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern, is set (179SGS158). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. It's time. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (179SGS159), and then the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in 179SGS157, every time the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the game state designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. , The first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variation pattern specification command, the variable display result specification command, the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command will be transmitted in sequence. Become. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result specification command is transmitted first, the first variable display start command, the second variable display start command, and the variation pattern The command may be transmitted in the order of the designated command, the game state designation command, the first hold storage number notification command, the second hold storage number notification command, or the like.

As described above, in the feature unit 179SG, when the variable display result is the jackpot B in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state, the fluctuation pattern is always selected by selecting the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B. Is determined as the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ, and if the variable display result is jackpot B in the 51st and subsequent variable displays in the high base state, the fluctuation pattern is always selected by selecting the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ.

Further, when the variable display result is the jackpot B in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state, the fluctuation pattern is always determined as the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ by selecting the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B. However, if the variable display result is jackpot A in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the fluctuation pattern is always changed to the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ by selecting the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. decide.

FIG. 8-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S113 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation processing of S112 to end the variable display of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to display the variable display. Control is performed to derive and display the stop symbol (179SGS181). When the variable display special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and the variable display special symbol is designated. When the buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol determination command to the effect control board 12 (179SGS182). Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is set (179SGS183), and if the jackpot flag is not set (179SGS183; N), the process proceeds to 179SGS191.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is set (179SGS183; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag if the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set (179SGS184). Further, if the time saving state variable display number counter is set, the time saving state variable display number counter is also cleared (179SGS185). Then, the effect control board 12 is set to transmit the jackpot start designation command according to the stored jackpot type (179SGS186).

Further, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a game state designation command indicating a normal state to the effect control board 12 (179SGS187).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (179SGS188). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 7 times for big hit A and 16 times for big hit B) is set in the big winning opening opening number counter (179SGS189). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (S114) (179SGS190).

On the other hand, in S191, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". When the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (179SGS191; Y), the process proceeds to 179SGS194.

On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (179SGS191; N), that is, in the high base state where the time reduction remains, the value of the time reduction counter is set to -1 (179SGS192). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" (179SGS193), and if it is not "0" (179SGS193; N), the process proceeds to 179SGS195, and the value of the time reduction counter is "0". In the case of (179SGS193; Y), the time saving flag is cleared (179SGSS194) in order to end the time saving control, and the process proceeds to 179SGS195.

In the 179SGS195, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". When the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (179SGS195; N), the process proceeds to 179SGS199.

Then, in 179SG199, the CPU 103 has only the high probability high base state and the probability change flag set in the gaming state corresponding to the set state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag (when both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set, the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set. In this case, the transmission setting of the game state specification command corresponding to the high accuracy and low base state, and the low accuracy and low base state when both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are not set) is set. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, the special symbol stop processing is terminated (179SGS200).

FIG. 8-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 5 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot end display timer is operating, that is, the timer is being counted (179SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not operating (179SGS201; N), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type of the completed jackpot game is jackpot B (179SGS202). When the jackpot type of the finished jackpot game is jackpot A (170SGS202 :; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to the time for performing the ending effect described later as the jackpot end display on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time). A value corresponding to the corresponding first display time is set (179SGSS203), and the process ends. When the jackpot type of the finished jackpot game is jackpot B (170SGS202 :; Y), the time for the image display device 5 to perform the ending effect described later as the jackpot end display on the jackpot end display timer (big hit end display time). ) Corresponds to the second display time (179SGSS204), and the process ends. The second display time is longer than the first display time described above. That is, the feature unit 179SG is set so that after the jackpot game of the jackpot B ends, the ending effect described later can be executed for a longer period of time than after the jackpot game of the jackpot A ends. The first display period in the feature unit 179SG is, for example, 20 seconds, and the second display period is, for example, 45 seconds.

On the other hand, when the jackpot end display timer is operating (179SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (179SGS205). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (179SGS206). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (179SGS206; Y), the CPU 103 sets both the time saving flag and the probability change flag (179SGS207, 179SGS208), and the number of special figure games controlled by the probability change counter to the probability change state. (Variable display count) "150" is set (179SGS209). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot type of the finished jackpot game is jackpot B (179SGS210). When the jackpot type of the completed jackpot game is jackpot A (179SGS210; N), the time reduction counter is set to "100", which is the number of special figure games (variable display times) controlled in the time reduction state, and is set to 179SGS213. When the jackpot type of the jackpot game that has been advanced (179SGS211) and finished is jackpot B (179SGS210; Y), the time reduction counter sets the number of special figure games (variable display number) controlled to the time reduction state. Set and proceed to 179SGS213 (179SGS212).

In the 179SGS213, the CPU 103 sets "0" in the time saving state variable display execution count counter. Then, the jackpot flag is cleared (179SGS214), and the transmission setting of the jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type is set (179SGS215). Then, after setting the transmission of the game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the set probability change flag and the time reduction flag (179SGS216), the value of the special figure process flag is processed in the special symbol normal process. The jackpot end process is terminated by updating to "0", which is a value corresponding to (179SGS217).

FIG. 8-20 is a part of the flowchart of the effect control process process (S76) in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment. In the effect control process process in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, after the pre-reading advance notice setting process (S161) shown in FIG. 7 is executed, it is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 179SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 179SG005U. S170 to S177 shown in FIG. 7 after executing the hold display update process (179SGS162) for updating the display mode and the number of display of the hold storage display according to the start winning command buffer 179SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B). It is designed to execute one of the processes of.

FIG. 8-21 is a flowchart showing a lookahead advance notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8-20. In the lookahead advance notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the start winning command buffer 179SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) (179SGS241), and there is an entry in which the hold display flag is not set. Whether or not it is determined (179SGS242). If there is no entry for which the hold display flag is not set, the lookahead advance notice setting process is terminated. If there is an entry for which the hold display flag is not set, the value of the hold display flag is already set to one of 1 to 4. It is determined whether or not there is an entry set (179SGS243).

If there is already an entry in which the value of the hold display flag is set to any of 1 to 4, that is, if the hold display notice effect has already been executed, the hold display flag is set in the entry (179SGS242). Set the hold display flag of (entry determined not to be present) to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the hold display notice effect (that is, it is decided to display the hold storage display corresponding to the entry with "○"). The pre-reading notice setting process is terminated (179SGS251). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry in which the value of the hold display flag is already set to any of 1 to 4 is the case where the hold display notice effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 179SGS243, if the hold display notice effect is already executed, the execution of the new hold display notice effect is restricted.

If there is no entry set in any of the values 1 to 4 of the hold display flag in 179 SGS 243, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the entry (the entry determined in 179 SGS 242 that the hold display flag is not set). ) Is determined whether or not the symbol designation command indicates a big hit (179SGS244). When the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a jackpot, the jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (179SGS245), and extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 179SG193. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the hold display notice effect and the jackpot type specified in 179SGS245, by referring to the hold display notice effect determination table (not shown), the presence / absence of execution of the hold display notice effect and the hold display The display pattern when the advance notice effect is executed is determined (179SGS246).

In 179SG246, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the hold display notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 8-22 (A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-22 (A), the presence / absence of the hold display advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the jackpot type specified in the processing of 179 SGS245.

In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, four types of display patterns (notice types) of the hold display notice effect are provided: display pattern α, display pattern β, display pattern γ, and display pattern δ. Of these, when the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 179SG005D or the second hold storage display area 179SG005U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 179SG005D or the second hold storage display area 179SG005U in a white star shape (☆). When the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the hold storage display is displayed on the first hold storage display area 179SG005D or the second hold storage display area 179SG005U by the blue camera, and the hold display is displayed. When the display pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern δ, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 179SG005D or the second hold storage display area 179SG005U by the red camera. When it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold storage display is displayed in a white circle (◯) in the first hold storage display area 179SG005D or the second hold storage display area 179SG005U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (A), when the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probability variable jackpot), non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 55%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 20%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%. Is decided, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is decided at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variation jackpot), non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Execution is decided, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 55%, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%, and execution is decided at a rate of 10%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

Returning to 179SGS244, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variation category from the variation category specification command of the entry (179SGS248) when the symbol designation command of the entry is a miss or a small hit, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the effect control. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the hold display notice effect extracted from the random counter of the counter setting unit 179SG193 and the big hit type specified in 179SGS249, refer to the hold display notice effect determination table at the time of small hit / miss (not shown). By doing so, it is determined whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and the display pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (B), when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is non-reach, the non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided at a rate of 5%, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 0%. The execution of the hold display notice effect is determined, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is out of order or small hit and the variable category is other (when the normal reach is off or small hit), it is decided that the hold display notice effect is not executed at a rate of 75%, and 20%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided at the ratio, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at the ratio of 5%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at the ratio of 0%. The execution of the effect is determined, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is Super Reach, it is decided that the hold display notice effect is not executed at a rate of 55%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%. Execution is decided, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 10%, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 5%, and execution is decided at a rate of 5%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 8-22 (A) and 8-22 (B), in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is executed, the hold display notice effect is not executed. When the jackpot game state is controlled at a higher rate than when the hold display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β, the hold display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α. The jackpot type is set to be jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variation jackpot) at a high rate. With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the big hit type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. Is a probabilistic jackpot, and the player's expectation of becoming a probabilistic jackpot can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns that suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect described later, the degree of expectation that the display pattern α and the display pattern β are controlled to the big hit game state (big hit expectation) Is not set to be high, and the degree of expectation (probability variation big hit expectation) that the big hit type is big hit B or big hit C is the same.

In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, the fluctuation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result is a big hit are the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach, and as shown in FIG. 8-22, the display pattern γ and The case where the display pattern δ is determined is the case where the variable display result is a big hit or the variable display result is out of order and the variable category is super reach. That is, it is also suggested that the hold storage display of the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (a mode of the blue or red camera) is a variable display of super reach that can execute the setting suggestion effect described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (B), when the fluctuation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the super reach. The hold memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Returning to FIG. 8-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the hold display advance notice effect is determined after the processing of the 179 SGS246 or 179SGS249 is executed (179SGS250). If it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold display flag of the entry is set to a value (any of 1 to 4) corresponding to the display pattern determined by the processing of 179SGS246 or 179SGS249 and read ahead. The notice setting process is terminated (179SGS247). If it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold display flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the hold display notice effect, and the lookahead notice setting process is terminated ( 179SGS251).

8-23 and 8-24 are flowcharts showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (179SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (179SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning reception command buffer (not shown) are set. Various command data and various flags stored in association with each other (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed) in the first to fourth first special figure hold storage The corresponding various command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (179SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in the 179SGS271 (179SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (179SGS273). If the second variation start command reception flag is not set (179SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variation start command reception flag is set (179SGS273; Y), the figure is shown. No start The various command data and various flags (that is, variable display is being displayed) stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of winning. Various command data and various flags corresponding to the second special symbol (various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth second special symbol hold storage) are shifted upward by one buffer number. (179SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing 179SGS272 or 179SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (179SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (179SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 179SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of the aligned decorative symbols (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111", "11", " It is determined from a combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbol) in which three symbols are aligned with "7" is determined as a stop symbol. To do. In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the chance eye indicating that it is a small hit as a stop symbol (third symbol is under a specific rule). It is determined from "334", "556", "778", etc.) that are not uniform. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the gaming state is a low base state (low probability low base state or high probability low base state) (179SGS276a). When the gaming state is the low base state (179SGS276a; Y), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (179SGS277). If the variable display variation pattern is not the super reach variation pattern, the process proceeds to 179SGS285. If the variable display variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern, the rear variable display suggestion effect is displayed during the variable display reach effect. Is executed (179SGS278), which determines whether or not to execute, and which effect is to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect. That is, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 179SGS277 to 179SG278, the rear variable display suggestion effect (big hit suggestion effect or setting suggestion effect) is a variable pattern of the super reach variation with a long special figure variation time. It can be executed only on the display, and is not executed on the variable display of the normal reach and non-reach fluctuation patterns with a short special figure fluctuation time.

In the variable display of the super reach in the low base state in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-32, the variable display is performed as a suggestion effect during the front variable display from the start timing of the variable display. The result is a big hit. A character effect suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5 or a timer effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit and the period until the execution start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is performed. A setting that is feasible and is set in the jackpot suggestion effect or the pachinko gaming machine 1 that suggests that the variable display result becomes a big hit as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the reach effect that is the latter half of the variable display. It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a value. That is, the process of 179 SGS278 is a process of determining whether or not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect and whether to execute the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect during the reach effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect. ..

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the rear variable display suggestion effect (either the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect) is determined in the processing of the 179 SGS 278 (179 SGS 279). If it is decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 179SGS278, the process proceeds to 179SGS285. The front variable display suggestion effect determination process for determining whether to execute the character effect or the timer effect as the variable display suggestion effect is executed (179SGS280). That is, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is not determined unless the execution of the rear variable display effect is determined, that is, the setting suggestion effect cannot be executed. In the variable display of reach and normal reach, the timer effect and the character effect are not executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display (179SGS281). When it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the period until the start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display on the timer for waiting for the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (as shown in FIG. 8-32 (A)). Set the value according to (5 seconds after the start of the reach effect) and proceed to 179SG285 (179SGS282). If it is decided to execute the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, wait for the suggestion effect start during the rear variable display. During variable display at the rear of the timer, the period until the start of the suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 8-32 (B), a value corresponding to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, the effect pattern of the timer effect is the effect for 25 seconds). If the period is pattern TS-1, 5 seconds after the start of the reach effect, and if the timer effect pattern is the pattern TS-2, which is the effect period of 30 seconds, 10 seconds after the start of the reach effect). ) To proceed to 179SGS285 (179SGS283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the fluctuation pattern in the 179 SGS285. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (179SGS286).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (179SGS287). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 179SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (179SGS288). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (179SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (179SGS290).

If it is determined in the processing of 179SGS276a that the gaming state is a high base state (high accuracy high base state) (179SGS276a; N), does the effect control CPU 120 further change the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ? It is determined whether or not (179SGS291). When the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern other than super reach γ (179SGS291; N), the high base medium for determining whether or not the high base medium variable display suggestion effect is executed and the high base medium variable display suggestion effect effect pattern After executing the variable display suggestion effect determination process (179SGS292), the process of 179SGS285 to 179SGS290 is executed to end the variable display start setting process.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ (179SGS291; Y), the special reach effect pattern determination process (179SGS293) for determining the effect pattern of the full rotation reach effect as the special reach effect to be executed after the reach is performed. At the same time, after selecting the process table corresponding to the special reach effect pattern determined in the special reach effect pattern determination process (179SGS294), the processes of 179SGS286 to 179SGS290 are executed to end the variable display start setting process. ..

FIG. 8-25 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect determination process (179SGS278) during the rear variable display in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-23. In the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-25, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the start winning command buffer 179SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) and has a hold display flag corresponding to the variable display. The value of is specified (179SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the hold display flag of the entry of "1-0" in the start winning command buffer 179SG194A is specified, and the second variable is displayed. When the display start command reception flag is set, the entry of "2-0" in the start winning command buffer 179SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect and the effect to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect based on the value of the hold display flag specified in 179 SGS301 (179SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), when the value of the hold display flag specified in 179 SGS301 is "0", that is, the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, 90% of the respondents decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 10% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 0% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Set as a suggestion effect during variable display Determine the execution of the suggestion effect. Further, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 179 SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the hold storage display is displayed as a white square or a star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. If so, the non-execution of the rear variable display suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 50%, the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 0%. Set as a suggestion effect during variable display at the rear Determines to execute the suggestion effect.

Further, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 179 SGS301 is "3", that is, when the hold storage display is displayed by the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, 30 %% Decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 35% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 35% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect. Then, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 179 SGS301 is "4", that is, when the hold storage display is displayed by the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is 0. %% Decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 30% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 70% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display, it is more than the case where the hold display notice effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Further, when the hold storage display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4"), It is higher than the case where the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "1" or "2"). It was set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display was determined by the ratio, and the hold memory display was displayed as a white square or star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case.

Also, pay attention to the case where the hold memory display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. The camera is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it is displayed, and the hold memory display is blue as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case where it is displayed in.

From the above, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in a quadrangle or a star shape as a hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is a suggestion effect during the rear variable display. While it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, the hold memory display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. In that case, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of the setting suggestion effect being executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect is higher than the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the game is further played. It is possible to draw people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 8-25, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined in the process of the 179 SGS 302 (179 SGS303). If it is decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 179SGS302, the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 179SGS302, further. It is determined whether or not the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display in the processing of the 179 SGS 302 (179 SGS304).

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 179SGS302, the effect pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is performed. Finish (179SGS305).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the process of 179 SGS305, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), a total of three effect patterns from pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3 are provided. Among these effect patterns, the pattern AS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and the pattern AS-2 is It is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the pattern AS-3 has the highest ratio of the variable display result to a big hit. It is a production pattern (big hit expectation: high) that suggests that it is high.

Then, in the above-mentioned processing of the 179SGS305, as shown in FIG. 8-27, when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the big hit suggestion effect is changed to the pattern AS-1 at a rate of 10%. Is determined to be pattern AS-2 at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display in the processing of the 179 SGS 302, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and sets a value (pachinko gaming machine 1) from the set value designation command received from the CPU 103. (Set value set in) is specified (179SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestion effect determination process during the rear variable display (179SGS307).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in 179SG307, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (B), a total of five patterns from pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-5 are provided. Of these patterns SS-1 to pattern SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests that the set value may be an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 has an even number of set values (for example, 1, 3, 5). For example, the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility of 2, 4, 6), and the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the set value is equal to or higher than the intermediate setting (for example, 3 or 5) closer to the odd number. Suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

The patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), and therefore, any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting). It is said that the degree of expectation is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the set value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the set value 5 and It is said that the expectation of being 6 is high.

In the feature unit 179SG, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low settings and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high settings, but the set values 1 to 3 may be set as low settings and the set values 4 to 6 may be set as high settings. Then, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set with the setting values 1 and 2 being the low setting, the setting values 3 and 4 being the intermediate setting, and the setting values 5 and 6 being the high setting.

In the process of the 179SGS307 described above, as shown in FIG. 8-28, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern at a ratio of 60% to the pattern SS-. Determined to be 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, pattern at a rate of 0% Decide on SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 60%, and 6 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 9% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 20 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 10% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 50%, and 10 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 20% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and 30 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 20% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 15 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 30% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 5% determines the pattern SS-5.

As described above, in the feature unit 179SG, it is suggested that the set value is one of 1 to 4 by executing the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the set value suggestion is made. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in the pattern SS-3 or the pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, it is confirmed that the set value is 6.

FIG. 8-29 is a flowchart showing a front variable display suggestion effect determination process (179 SGS280) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-23. In the front variable display suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-29, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result of the variable display (179SGS311). In addition, it is determined whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (179SGS312).

If it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the presence or absence of the front variable display suggestion effect and the front variable display suggestion based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect and the variable display result. The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (179SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and the rate of 30%. Determines the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is out of order, 70% of the time, 70% of the time, the non-execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is decided, and 25% of the time, the character effect is decided as the front variable display, the suggestion effect. Then, at a rate of 5%, the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

In other words, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. The execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and if the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the character effect and the execution of the timer effect are determined at the same ratio as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, while the variable display result. If is off, the execution of the character effect is determined at a higher rate than the execution of the timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display, that is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect. It is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect and executes the front variable display suggestion effect based on the variable display result. The presence / absence and the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the variable front display are determined from the character effect and the timer effect (179SGS314). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and the rate is 0%. Determines the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 70%. If the variable display result is out of alignment, 80% of the time, 80% of the time, the non-execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is decided, and 0% of the time, the character effect is decided as the front variable display, the suggestion effect. Then, at a rate of 20%, the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

That is, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and the execution of the character effect is not determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. That is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order as a result. When a timer effect is executed as an effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-29, after the execution of 179SGS313 or 179SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined (179SGS315). If it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the front part is further determined. It is determined whether or not the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the variable display (179SGS316).

If the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated. (179SGS317).

As a character effect effect pattern that can be determined in the processing of 179 SGS317, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2, are provided. .. Among these effect patterns, pattern CS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 is the lowest. Yes, the pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) suggesting that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit by displaying the character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than that of the pattern CS-1. ).

Therefore, in the processing of the 179SGS317, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the character effect at a rate of 20% to the pattern CS-1. The pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined to be pattern CS-1 at a rate of 80%, and to pattern CS-2 at a rate of 20%.

Further, when the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. Is determined and stored, and the suggestion effect determination process during the variable display of the unit is terminated (179SGS318).

As a timer effect effect pattern that can be determined in the processing of the 179 SGS318, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided. Among these effect patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit in the image display device 5 is higher than that of the character effect pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 (big hit expectation: high). ) And the effect that suggests the period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display for 25 seconds together with the image of the character X. The pattern TS-2 is the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a big hit in the image display device 5. Is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character effect (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is started for 25 seconds together with the image of the character Y. (See FIGS. 8-31 (C), 8-40 (D), and 8-40 (E)).

Therefore, in the processing of the 179 SGS 318, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (B), when the rear variable display suggestion effect whose execution is determined is the jackpot suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 produces a timer effect. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and to pattern TS-2 at a rate of 20%. Further, when the rear variable display suggestion effect whose execution is determined is the setting suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern TS- at a rate of 20%. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 rather than in the pattern TS-1 (that is, the timer). When the effect period of the effect is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A), the rate at which the set suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, the player can pay attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5. Further, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, it is possible to expect the player to execute the setting suggestion effect as compared with the case where the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (D), when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect, the front variable display suggestion effect is performed. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the character effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. The production is to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-32, when the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect during the variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 is determined in the variable display effect process (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestion effect during the front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the subsequent variable display effect process (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the rear variable display suggestion effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the variable display process is executed. Then, based on the value of the timer for waiting for the suggestion effect during the rear variable display to become 0, the process data corresponding to the determined effect pattern of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set. Then, in the subsequent variable display effect processing (S172), the effect device may be controlled according to the contents of the process data according to the process timer.

As shown in FIGS. 8-32 (A) and 8-32 (B), the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect in the feature unit 179SG are during the execution period of the reach effect. It is executed for 7 seconds, which is a period longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, even if the player takes his eyes off the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect.

FIG. 8-33 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in 179 SGS291 of FIG. 8-24 as the process of determining the variable display suggestion effect in high base. In the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (179SGS321), determines whether or not the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect is executed, and suggests the variable display during the harmful work base. The production pattern of the production is determined (179SGS322).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-34 (A), when the variable display result is out of reach and the fluctuation pattern is non-reach (non-reach out of reach), the base is high at a rate of 100%. Decided not to execute the medium variable display suggestion effect, and decided to execute the high base medium variable display suggestion effect pattern at 0% rate, and decided to execute it on KS-1. The execution in KS-2 is decided, and the execution in the pattern KS-3 of the variable display suggestion effect in high base is decided at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is out of order and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (when the normal reach is out of order), it is decided at a rate of 50% that the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect is not executed, and at a rate of 40%. The execution of the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect pattern KS-1 was decided, and the execution of the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect pattern KS-2 was decided at a rate of 10%, and the high base was determined at a rate of 0%. The execution of the medium variable display suggestion effect pattern KS-3 is determined.

In addition, when the variable display result is out of order and the fluctuation pattern is super reach (when the super reach is out of order), it is decided at a rate of 30% that the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect is not executed, and 30%. The execution of the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect pattern KS-1 was decided at a rate of 30%, and the execution of the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect pattern KS-2 was decided at a rate of 0%. The execution in the pattern KS-3 of the variable display suggestion effect in the high base is determined.
If the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect pattern KS-1 is used at a rate of 20%. The execution is decided, the execution in the pattern KS-2 of the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 60%, and the execution in the pattern KS-3 of the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 10%. decide.

If the variable display result is a small hit, the non-execution of the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 100%, and the pattern KS-1 of the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect is used at a rate of 0%. Is decided to be executed in the pattern KS-2 of the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect at a rate of 0%, and is executed in the pattern KS-3 of the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect at a rate of 0%. To determine.

As shown in FIG. 8-34 (B), the pattern KS-1, which is an effect pattern of the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect, is a case where the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect is not executed in the image display device 5. This is an effect pattern for displaying a message (for example, "chance") indicating that the variable display result has a high rate of big hits (high expectation of big hits) in blue, and the pattern KS-2 is an image display. This is an effect pattern in which a message (for example, "hot") indicating that the variable display result has a higher rate of big hits (higher expectation of big hits) than the pattern KS-1 in the device 5 is displayed in red. The pattern KS-3 is an effect pattern for displaying a message (for example, "big hit confirmation" or the like) informing the image display device 5 that the variable display result is a big hit in rainbow colors.

That is, as the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect in the feature unit 179SG, the jackpot expectation differs depending on the content of the message displayed on the image display device 5 (big hit expectation for each message: "big hit confirmed"> " "Hot"> "Chance"), the expectation of big hits differs depending on the color of these messages. In particular, displaying these messages in rainbow colors means that the variable display result will always be a big hit (expectation of big hits for each message color: rainbow color> red> blue).

Returning to FIG. 8-33, after executing the process of 179 SGS 322, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect (179 SGS 323). When it is decided to execute the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect (179SGS323; Y), the determined effect pattern is memorized and the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect determination process is terminated (179SGS324), and the high-base medium variable display suggestion is suggested. When it is determined not to execute the effect (179 SGS323; N), the process of determining the variable display suggestion effect in the high base is terminated without executing the process of 179 SGS324.

When the execution of the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect is determined, the effect control CPU 120 outputs the process data according to the determined high-base medium variable display suggestion effect effect pattern in the variable display medium effect process (S172). The effect device may be controlled according to the contents of the process data according to the process timer in the subsequent variable display effect process (S172).

FIG. 8-35 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in 179 SGS293 of FIG. 8-24 as the special reach effect pattern determination process. In the special reach effect pattern determination process, the effect control CPU 120 specifies whether or not the special reach effect is executed from the first hit to the variable display (179SGS331), and the special reach effect is performed from the first hit to the variable display. It is determined whether or not there is an execution of (179SGS332). When there is no execution of the special reach effect from the first hit to the variable display (179SGS332; N), the effect pattern of the special reach effect is determined and memorized from the effect patterns α to the effect pattern γ (179SGS333), and the special reach effect is produced. The pattern determination process ends. On the other hand, when there is execution of the special reach effect from the first hit to the variable display (179SGS332; Y), the effect pattern of the special reach effect is determined and memorized from the effect patterns excluded from the previously executed effect pattern (179 SGS332; Y). 179SGS334), the special reach effect pattern determination process is completed. In the process of 179SGS331, it is sufficient to specify whether or not the special reach effect is executed from the first hit to the variable display depending on whether or not there is an effect pattern stored in these 179SGS333 and 179SGS334.

In the processing of 179SGS333, as shown in FIG. 8-36 (A), the execution of the special reach effect in the effect pattern α is determined at a rate of 33.3%, and the execution in the special reach effect effect pattern β is determined. Is determined at a rate of 33.3%, and the execution of the special reach effect in the effect pattern γ is determined at a rate of 33.4%.

In the processing of 179SGS334, the special reach effect is executed from the first hit to the variable display, and when the previous special reach effect is executed by the effect pattern α, as shown in FIG. 8-36 (B). In addition, the execution of the special reach effect in the production pattern α is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of the special reach effect in the effect pattern β is determined at a rate of 50%, and the execution in the special reach effect effect pattern γ is determined. Is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, when the special reach effect is executed from the first hit to the variable display and the previous special reach effect is executed in the effect pattern β, as shown in FIG. 8-36 (C), the special reach effect is executed. The execution of the reach effect effect pattern α is determined at a rate of 50%, the execution of the special reach effect effect pattern β is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the special reach effect effect pattern γ is 50%. Determined by the ratio of. Then, when the special reach effect is executed from the first hit to the variable display and the previous special reach effect is executed by the effect pattern γ, as shown in FIG. 8-36 (D), the special reach effect is executed. The execution of the reach effect effect pattern α is determined at a rate of 50%, the execution of the special reach effect effect pattern β is determined at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the special reach effect effect pattern γ is 0%. Determined by the ratio of.

As shown in FIG. 8-36 (E), the effect pattern α for the special reach effect is a full-rotation reach effect in which the character X is mainly displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect pattern β for the special reach effect. Is a full-rotation reach effect in which the character Y is mainly displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect pattern γ of the special reach effect is a full-rotation reach effect in which the character Z is mainly displayed on the image display device 5. ..

After the effect control CPU 120 executes the special reach effect pattern determination process, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect pattern of the special reach effect in the process of 179 SGS294 (see FIG. 8-24). Further, by executing the processes of 179SGS286 to 179SGS290, a special reach effect is executed in the variable display in the high base state.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (A), there are cases where variable display is executed with a fluctuation pattern of super reach α and super reach β in a high base state and the variable display result is a jackpot A. In the case where the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α or the super reach β in the 51st and subsequent variable displays in the high base state and the variable display result is the jackpot B, the effect control CPU 120 is the variable display. It is possible to execute the high-base medium variable display suggestion effect during the period of 20 seconds between the start and the reach, and during the execution period of the reach effect (23 seconds or 33 seconds after the reach). From the second timing during the execution period of the reach effect to the end of the variable display, the operation of the movable body 179SG300 and the display of the rainbow-colored effect image 179SG005K (see FIG. 8-46) on the image display device 5 are displayed. After that, the jackpot confirmation notification effect that stops and displays the decorative pattern is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (B), in the case where the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state and the variable display result is the jackpot B. The effect control CPU 120 operates the movable body 179SG300 from the first timing during the period of 20 seconds between the start of the variable display and the reach, and the rainbow-colored effect image 179SG005K in the image display device 5 (FIG. 8). -45) is displayed, and the player is notified that the variable display result is the jackpot B. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes a special reach effect (full rotation reach effect) on the image display device 5 over the execution period of the reach effect (160 seconds after the reach is reached), and ends the special reach effect. The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed near the timing. That is, the jackpot confirmation notification effect in FIG. 8-37 (B) is the rainbow-colored effect image 179SG005K (see FIG. 8-45) of the movable body 179SG300 and the image display device 5 executed during the 20 seconds before the reach. It is composed of a display and a stop display for the decorative design during the reach production.

As described above, in the feature unit 179SG, when the variable display result is the jackpot A in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (A), the reach effect is produced. While it is notified that the movable body 179SG300 operates from the second timing during the execution period and the variable display result becomes a big hit, the variable display result is a large value B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state. In the case of, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (B), the movable body 179SG300 operates from the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach, and the variable display result is a big hit. It is notified that (big hit B) will occur.

Focusing on the case where the variable display result is the jackpot B in the high base state, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (C), when the variable display number is 1 to 50, the rate is 100%. While being notified that the variable display will be a big hit from the 1st timing (the timing within 20 seconds of the reach from the start of the variable display), the 2nd timing (the timing during execution of the reach effect later than the 1st timing) ) Does not notify that the variable display is a big hit. When the variable display count is 51st or later, the variable display is not notified from the first timing that the variable display will be a big hit, while the variable display is a big hit from the second timing at a rate of 100%. Is to be notified.

In the feature unit 179SG, when the variable display result is a big hit B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, it is always notified that the variable display is a big hit at the first timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case where the variable display result is the jackpot B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the variable is said at the second timing. A case may be provided in which a notification that the display is a big hit is notified.

FIG. 8-38 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S177 of FIG. 7 as the ending effect process. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the ending effect process timer is operating (179SGS341). When the ending effect process timer is not in operation (179SGS341; N), the ending effect process timer corresponding to the jackpot type is set (179SGS342). In the processing of 179SGS342 of this feature unit 179SG, if the jackpot type is jackpot A, an ending effect process timer for executing the ending effect for 20 seconds according to the first display period described above is set, and the jackpot type If is a big hit B, the ending effect process timer for executing the ending effect for 45 seconds according to the second display period described above may be set.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the ending effect process timer (179SGS343) and controls the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) according to the contents of the process data 1 to produce the ending effect. The process ends (179SGS344).

When the ending effect process timer is operating in the process of 179 SGS341 (179SGS341; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the ending effect process timer by -1 (179SGS345), and the ending is set to -1. It is determined whether or not the effect process timer has timed out, that is, whether or not the value of the ending effect process timer has become 0 (179SGS346). When the ending effect process timer has timed out (179SGS346; Y), the ending effect process data is switched (179SGS347) and the next ending effect process timer is started (179SGS348). Then, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data (179 SGS349), and the ending effect process is completed.

When the ending effect timer is not timer-out (179SGS346; N), the effect device is controlled according to the absence of process data corresponding to the ending effect process timer (179SGS350), and the ending effect process is terminated.

When the ending effect process timer is timer-out in the process of 179 SGS346, if the timer-out ending effect process timer is the last ending effect process timer, the effect control CPU 120 may end the ending effect.

As described above, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect process, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (A), at the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot A, the image display device 5 displays the first high base as the ending effect. The state rush effect is displayed for 20 seconds. After that, the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy and high base state. The high-accuracy high-base state is controlled to the low-accuracy high-base state by executing the variable display 100 times, and is controlled to the low-accuracy low-base state by further executing the variable display 50 times. To.

That is, the first high base state rush effect in the feature unit 179SG is controlled to a high base state over 100 variable displays and is controlled to a highly accurate state over 150 variable displays. It is also a production that informs.

As shown in FIG. 8-39 (A), in the first high base state rush effect, "100 times" is displayed as the variable display number (time reduction number) controlled to the high base state in the image display device 5. It has become so.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (B), at the end of the big hit game of the big hit B, the first ending effect and the second ending effect are executed. More specifically, first, the first high base state rush effect is displayed on the image display device 5 for 20 seconds, and then the second high base state rush effect is displayed on the image display device 5 for 25 seconds. Will be done. In particular, in the second high base state rush effect, the movable body 179SG300 operates for 5 seconds after the start of the second high base state rush effect. After that, the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy and high base state. The high accuracy and high base state is controlled to the low accuracy and low base state by executing the variable display 150 times.

That is, the second high base state rush effect in the feature unit 179SG is controlled to the high base state over 150 times of variable display and is controlled to the high accuracy state over 150 times of variable display. The ending effect shown in FIG. 8-39 (B) includes, in addition to the above-mentioned first high base state rush effect, a second high base state rush effect.

In the ending effect shown in FIG. 8-39 (B), during the execution of the first high base state rush effect, the variable display number (time reduction number) that is once controlled to the high base state by the image display device 5 is set to ". "100 times" is displayed. Then, the display of "100 times" is updated to "150 times" in a predetermined period during execution of the second high base state rush effect (time reduction number display update period shown in FIG. 8-39 (B)). ..

As shown in FIG. 8-39 (B), in the first high base state rush effect, the display of "100 times", which is the variable display number controlled to the high base state, is executed in an instant, while The update from the "100 times" display to the "150 times" display in the second high base state rush effect is executed over a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds).

Next, the effect mode during the variable display in the low base state in the feature unit 179SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-40 to 8-42. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-40 (A) and 8-40 (B), a new start prize is generated during the variable display, and the hold memory display is displayed as a look-ahead notice effect based on the start prize. When the pattern is determined to be the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, a new hold storage display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera in the first hold storage display area 179SG005D and the second hold storage display area 179SG005U. ..

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-40 (C) to 8-40 (E), as a new variable display, when the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display, which is the mode of the camera, is started, the front part The timer effect as a suggestion effect is started during the variable display. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-1, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (D), the image 179SG005X of the character X is displayed on the left side of the image display device 5, and the rear part. The update display of the timer for 25 seconds, which is the period until the suggestion effect during the variable display, is started. Further, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (E), the image 179SG005Y of the character Y is displayed on the left portion of the image display device 5, and the rear portion is variable. The update display of the timer for 30 seconds, which is the period until the suggestion effect during display, is started.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 8-41 (F) to 8-41 (H), when the variable display progresses together with the update display of the timer up to the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the super reach effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds during the execution of the super reach effect (the timer effect ends), the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect is started as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Specifically, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, and the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 8-41 (I). A message indicating that the jackpot expectation is low, such as "chance!", Is displayed on the image display device 5, and if the determined production pattern is pattern AS-2, it is shown in FIG. 8-41 (J). As described above, if a message indicating that the jackpot expectation such as “hot!” Is higher than that of the pattern AS-1 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the determined effect pattern is the pattern AS-3, FIG. As shown in −41 (K), a message indicating that the jackpot expectation such as “super hot!” Is higher than that of the pattern AS-2 is displayed on the image display device 5.

On the other hand, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect is as shown in FIGS. 8-42 (L) to 8-42 (P). In the case of the pattern SS-1 to the pattern SS-4, the image display device 5 displays the setting value suggestion images 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG005J, and 131SG005K of different characters, so that the pachinko machine 1 is set. The setting value is suggested. Further, when the effect pattern of the set value suggestion effect is the pattern SS-5, the set value suggestion image 131SGS005L, which is a collection of all the characters displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to the pattern SS-4, is the image display device. It is displayed at 5.

As described above, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice, the look-ahead notice is not executed or the hold memory display is displayed. The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when is displayed as a white square or a star. For this reason, the player suggests the setting by a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, which is possessed in anticipation that the setting suggestion effect will be executed in advance when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera. You can now be ready to shoot the production. That is, the hold memory display of the blue or red camera mode in the feature unit 179SG is also an effect of urging the player to prepare for shooting the setting suggestion effect.

Next, the effect mode at the end of the big hit game and in the high base state will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-43 to 8-46.

First, as shown in FIGS. 8-43 (A) and 8-43 (B), when the jackpot game of jackpot A is completed, the first high base state rush effect is executed as the ending effect. At this time, the image display device 5 displays "100 times" as the variable display number (time reduction number) controlled to the high base state. Then, after the first high base state rush effect is completed, the game state is controlled to the high accuracy high base state.

Next, during the execution of the jackpot game of jackpot B, as shown in FIGS. 8-44 (A) and 8-44 (B), a predetermined round of the jackpot game (8 rounds in FIG. 8-44 (B)). In the eye), it is notified that the jackpot game is a 16-round jackpot game and that the jackpot game is controlled to a high base state over 150 variable displays after the jackpot game is completed.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, as shown in FIG. 8-44 (C), the first high base state rush effect is first executed as a part of the ending effect, and the image display device 5 controls the high base state. "100 times" is displayed as the variable display number (time reduction number) to be displayed. Next, when the first high base state rush effect is completed, as shown in FIGS. 8-44 (D) and 8-44 (E), the second high base state rush effect is performed from the standby position of the movable body 179SG300. The movement (operation) toward the effect position and the movement (operation) from the effect position to the standby position are executed. When the movable body 179SG300 returns to the standby position, the display of "100 times" displayed on the image display device 5 is updated to "150 times".

When the variable display result is the jackpot B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the variable display is started as shown in FIGS. 8-45 (A) to 8-45 (C). Then, the movement (operation) of the movable body 179SG300 from the standby position to the effect position is executed. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the rainbow-colored effect image 179SG005K so as to partially overlap the movable body 179SG300 located at the effect position. Therefore, the player can recognize that the variable display result of the variable display is the jackpot B by the operation of the movable body 179SG300 and the display of the effect image 179SG005K, so that the game interest can be improved.

Then, when the movable body 179SG300 is moved (moved) from the effect position to the standby position, the image display device 5 performs the full rotation reach effect as any of the effect patterns α to the effect pattern γ as a special reach effect. Will be executed. During the execution of the full rotation reach effect, the image display device 5 displays the effect image 179SG005M different from the effect image 179SG005K in rainbow colors together with the image of the full rotation reach effect. Therefore, the player recognizes that the variable display result of the variable display is the jackpot B by recognizing the display of the effect image 179SG005M in addition to the operation of the movable body 179SG300 and the display of the effect image 179SG005K described above. Because it can be done, the game entertainment can be further improved.

Further, when the variable display result is the jackpot B in the 51st and subsequent variable displays in the high base state, or when the variable display result is the jackpot A in the high base state, FIGS. 8-46 (A) to 8 As shown in −46 (C), the reach effect is executed in the same manner as in the low base state. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-46 (D), the movable body 179SG300 is moved from the standby position to the effect position during the reach effect, and the rainbow-colored effect image 179SG005K is displayed on the image display device 5. Is executed to notify that the variable display result becomes a big hit.

Then, after the movable body 179SG300 is moved from the effect position to the standby position, the rainbow-colored effect image 179SG005M is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit. ..

As described above, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect and a timer effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the character effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display that suggests the expectation of a big hit. As shown in -30 (D), when the timer effect is executed during the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed during the variable display. Will be executed. That is, when the timer effect is executed, the player pays more attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit because the jackpot expectation is higher than when the character effect is executed. The setting suggestion effect is executed while the player is paying attention, and the player can prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked.

Further, as the front variable display suggestion effect during variable display, in addition to the character effect, a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the rear variable display suggestion effect can be executed, so that the setting suggestion effect can be performed. By executing the setting suggestion effect, the player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggestion effect.

In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as a timer effect, the period until the execution start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is displayed as a numerical value (see FIGS. 8-40 (D) and 8-40 (E)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timer effect, for example, it is suggested that the rear variable display is performed by displaying an increase / decrease of a gauge, a meter, or the like. It is possible not to clearly notify the period until the start of execution of the effect (suggest only the approximate period).

Further, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-40 (D) and 8-40 (E), an embodiment in which the timer effect is executed by displaying an image on the image display device 5 is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and the display means other than the image display device 5. Any one aspect of the display in (1) or a plurality of aspects may be combined and executed.

Further, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-41 (H) and 8-42 (L), the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect is 0. Based on this, a jackpot suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. That is, even when the timer effect is executed, the jackpot suggestion effect may be executed instead of the setting suggestion effect, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 becomes 0 as the timer effect, the setting suggestion effect and the jackpot suggestion effect are performed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. Although only one of them can be executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and is based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect becomes 0. , Both the setting suggestion performance and the jackpot suggestion production may be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Further, the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the rear variable display suggestion effect is always executed when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect but the rear variable display suggestion effect is not executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-31 (B) and 8-31 (C), as the effect pattern of the timer effect, the pattern TS-1 having an effect period of 25 seconds and the pattern having an effect period of 30 seconds TS-2 is provided, and when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. That is, it is suggested that when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion effect is executed for a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-32, since the rear variable display suggestion effect including the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half period in the variable display of the super reach, the setting suggestion effect by the player is performed. Can be further prevented from being overlooked.

In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half period in the variable display of the super reach, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, there may be a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first half period in the variable display of the super reach.

Further, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 and 8-26, the display mode of the hold memory display is changed to a white square or star shape, a blue or red camera as a look-ahead notice. In the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display (the value of the hold display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera whose display mode is blue or red, it is possible to execute the hold display notice effect that can be displayed by the mode or the like. It is possible to determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display (the value of the hold display flag is 1 or 2) whose display mode is a white square or a star. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display (the value of the hold display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera whose display mode is blue or red, the player decides whether or not the variable display result is a big hit. Since the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-40 and 8-42, the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment corresponds to the hold storage display which is the target of the hold display notice effect when the hold display notice effect is executed. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in the variable display (variable display immediately after the hold display notice effect is finished). For this reason, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display, which is the target of the hold display notice effect, so that the player can miss the setting suggestion effect. It can be further prevented.

In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the hold display notice effect can be executed as a look-ahead notice is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display notice is given as a look-ahead notice. It may be possible to execute an effect other than the effect, and suggest that the setting suggestion effect is executed as the effect mode of the effect.

Further, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display which is the target of the hold display notice effect (variable display immediately after the hold display notice effect is finished). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is more than the start of the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display which is the target of the hold display notice effect during the execution period of the hold display notice effect. It may be possible to execute the setting suggestion effect from the previous timing).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-22, the ratio of displaying the hold memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice effect is such that the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star as the look-ahead notice effect. Since it is set lower than the display ratio, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, so that the hold memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. It is possible to draw attention to the person and further prevent the technician from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of displaying the hold memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice effect is the ratio of displaying the hold memory display as the look-ahead notice effect in a white square or star shape. Although the embodiment set lower than the display ratio in is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading notice effect. The ratio may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the hold memory display as a pre-reading notice effect with a white square or a star shape, or the hold memory display may be set as a pre-read notice effect of a blue or red camera. The ratio of displaying in the mode and the ratio of displaying the hold memory display as a white square or a star as a pre-reading notice effect may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as a hold display notice effect, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera to prepare the player for shooting the setting suggestion effect. Since the player can prepare a form terminal such as a smartphone before the start of the setting suggestion effect, the success rate of shooting the setting suggestion effect by the player can be increased.

In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as a hold display notice effect, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera to prepare the player for shooting the setting suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the hold storage display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a hold display notice effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are used. The player may be separately urged to prepare for shooting the setting suggestion effect by the sound output of the above, the display of the message image on the image display device 5, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, the hold display notice effect is provided by the display pattern γ that displays the hold memory display in the form of a blue camera and the display pattern δ that displays the hold memory display in the form of a red camera. It is feasible, and as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera (when the value of the hold display flag is 3), the hold memory display is red. The rate at which the setting suggestion effect is executed is different from the case where the display is performed in the mode of the camera (when the value of the hold display flag is 4). In particular, when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the red camera, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera. When the display is displayed in the mode of the red camera, the player pays more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed than when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the hold memory display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display starts. Although the embodiment in which the mode does not change has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display mode of the hold memory display changes from the mode of the blue camera to the mode of the red camera. In addition, a case is provided in which the hold storage display corresponding to the variable display during execution is continuously displayed as the active display, and the display mode of the active display is changed from the mode of the blue camera to the mode of the red camera. You may. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention as to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed until the variable display is completed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 179SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-23, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is only in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach having a long special figure fluctuation time. Since it is feasible and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time, it is suppressed that the setting suggestion effect is executed during the short variable display period, and the game It is possible to prevent the person from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-32, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is set to 7 seconds, which is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, so that the super reach is variable. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect during the display (during the execution of the reach effect).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-22, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is a super reach capable of executing the setting suggestion effect. Since it is suggested that the display is variable, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed by displaying the hold memory display in the form of a blue or red camera. Can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-22, when the fluctuation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the super reach, the hold display is displayed. Since the hold memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a notice effect, the player was paying attention to the fact that the hold memory display was displayed in the form of a blue or red camera. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being not executed and the interest from being lowered because the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is a variable display such as non-reach or normal reach.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-23 to 8-32, during the variable display of the super reach, the suggestion effect during the front variable display including the timer effect can be executed, but it is more special than the variable display of the super reach. Figure The timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach with a short fluctuation time, so the timer effect is not executed during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect. The timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach. It is possible to prevent inconsistency in the production due to the execution of.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-17, when the variable display result is the jackpot B in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected. If the fluctuation pattern is always determined as the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ and the variable display result is the jackpot B in the 51st and subsequent variable displays in the high base state, be sure to select the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Since the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns of normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β, the jackpot gaming state of jackpot B is prevented from occurring continuously in a short period of time, and the variable display is performed. Since it is notified that the variable display result is the jackpot B at one timing, it is possible to prevent an increase in dissatisfaction and a delay due to a long variable display period.

In the feature unit 179SG, the operation of the movable body 179SG300 for notifying that the variable display result is a big hit is executed from the first timing before the reach is reached, and after the reach is reached (during the reach production). ) Has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the first timing is earlier than the second timing, the first timing and the first timing are provided. The movable body 179SG300 may be operated from each of the two timings as the timing before reaching or the timing after reaching.

Further, the feature unit 179SG exemplifies a mode in which the variable display result is notified as a jackpot A or a jackpot B by operating the movable body 179SG300 during the variable display in the high base state. The invention is not limited to this, and when the movable body 179SG300 operates during the variable display in the high base state, it may be limited to the case where the variable display result is the jackpot B. By doing so, the player can pay attention to whether or not the movable body 179SG300 operates during the variable display in the high base state, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 179SG, when the variable display result is the jackpot B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the variation pattern is always determined as the variation pattern of the super reach γ. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a jackpot B in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the fluctuation pattern is changed to the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ. It may be possible to determine the fluctuation pattern of super reach α, super reach β, and normal reach at a ratio lower than the ratio to be determined. Furthermore, when the variable display result is a jackpot B in the 51st and subsequent variable displays in the high base state, the fluctuation pattern is set to a ratio that is smaller than the fluctuation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, and normal reach. A case may be provided in which the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ is determined.

Further, in this feature unit 179SG, the variable display from the 1st to 50th times, which is the "first period" after the end of the big hit game, and the variable display from the 51st time onward, which is the "second period" (51st to 100th times or 51st time). (Variable display up to ~ 150 times) and the mode controlled to the high accuracy and high base state are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this and is controlled to the high accuracy and high base state in the present invention. The period to be performed may include a "third period" in addition to the "first period" and the "second period". Regarding these "first period", "second period", and "third period", if the "second period" is a period after the "first period", the "third period" is " It may be a period before the "first period", a period between the "first period" and the "second period", or a period after the "second period".

Further, when the variable display result is the jackpot B in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state, the effect control CPU 120 is specially executed by executing the special reach effect pattern determination process shown in FIGS. 8-35. Since it is possible to execute the full rotation reach effect as the reach effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the jackpot confirmation notification effect in the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state.

In the feature unit 179SG, when the variable display result is the jackpot B in the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state, the full rotation reach effect is performed as a part of the jackpot confirmation notification effect during the variable display. Although the feasible form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a part of the jackpot confirmation notification effect, an effect different from the full rotation reach effect may be executed.

Further, when the full rotation reach effect is executed during the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state, the rainbow-colored effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the operation of the movable body 179SG300 before the full rotation reach effect. Since 179SG005M is displayed, it becomes easy to understand that the jackpot B is controlled to the jackpot game state after the variable display, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The feature unit 179SG exemplifies a form in which the rainbow-colored effect image 179SG005M is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the operation of the movable body 179SG300 during the 1st to 50th variable displays in the high base state. The invention is not limited to this, and if it is easy to understand that the jackpot game state of the jackpot B is controlled after the variable display, the effects executed before the full rotation reach effect are movable. It may be an effect other than the operation of the body 179SG300 and the display of the rainbow-colored effect image 179SG005M.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-35 and 8-36, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the special reach effect in any of the effect patterns α to the effect pattern γ, and can also perform the effect pattern of the special reach effect. When deciding, since the production pattern is determined from excluding the production pattern executed last time, it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the game interest due to the special reach production being repeatedly executed in the same production pattern. ..

In the feature unit 179SG, a form in which the effect pattern of the special reach effect can be determined from the three effect patterns from the effect pattern α to the effect pattern γ is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, for example, the effect pattern of the special reach effect may be determined from two or less effect patterns, or may be determined from four or more effect patterns.

Further, in the feature unit 179SG, as for the effect pattern of the special reach effect once determined to be executed, a form in which the special reach effect is determined again by executing the special reach effect in another effect pattern is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for the special reach effect once determined to be executed, until a predetermined period elapses (until a predetermined number of variable displays are executed or a predetermined time elapses). It may be undecidable again as a production pattern for a special reach effect. Furthermore, for the special reach effect once decided to be executed, it is special until the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy and low base state, or until the pachinko gaming machine 1 generates an electric stage (until the power is turned off). It may be undecidable again as a production pattern of reach production.

In addition, in this feature unit 179SG, when determining the production pattern of the special reach production, the special reach production is continuous in the specific production pattern by determining by the production pattern lottery from excluding the previous production pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by determining the effect pattern for each execution number of the special reach effect in advance, the present invention is special. It may be prevented that the reach effect is continuously executed in a specific effect pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-39, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the first high base state rush effect and the second high base state rush effect as the ending effect after the big hit game. In particular, after the big hit game of the big hit B, after displaying "100 times" which is the variable display number controlled to the high base state by the image display device 5 by executing the first high base state rush effect, the second 2 The movable body 179SG300 is operated as a high-base state rush effect, and the display of "100 times", which is the variable display number controlled in the high-base state, is switched to the display of "150 times" to enter the big hit game state. It is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming excessively increased by shortening the controlled interval.

In this feature unit 179SG, only the first high base state rush effect is executed after the big hit game of the big hit A, and after the big hit game of the big hit B, the second high base state is further executed after the first high base state rush effect. Although the mode of executing the rush effect is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the big hit game of the big hit B, a part of the effect is different from the first high base state rush effect. The second high base state rush effect may be executed after executing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-39 (B) and 8-44 (F), the feature unit 179SG controls the movable body 179SG300 to the high base state after the movable body 179SG300 operates as the second high base state rush effect. The present invention exemplifies a mode in which the display of "100 times", which is the variable display number of times, is updated to the display of "150 times" over a predetermined period, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display of "100 times", which is the variable display number controlled to the high base state, is directly "150 times" without going through the update display of the predetermined period in the previous term after the movable body 179SG300 operates as the second high base state rush effect. You may update to the display of.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-44 (D) to 8-44 (F), as the second high base state rush effect, the display of "100 times" displayed on the image display device 5 is "150 times". By updating to the display of ", it is possible to emphasize to the player that the player is controlled to the high-accuracy high-base state over a maximum of 150 variable displays, so that the second high-base state rush effect is produced. However, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the game entertainment caused by the longer production period than the first high-base state rush production.

Further, the display of "100 times", which is the variable display number controlled to the high base state in the image display device 5, is updated to "150 times" as the movable body 179SG300 operates, so that the maximum number of times is 150. Since it is possible to further emphasize to the player that the high-accuracy high-base state is controlled over the variable display, the second high-base state rush effect has a longer production period than the first high-base state rush effect. It is possible to further reduce the deterioration of the game entertainment caused by the long time.

In the feature unit 179SG, the display of "100 times", which is the variable display number controlled to the high base state in the image display device 5, is updated to "150 times" along with the operation of the movable body 179SG300. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of “100 times”, which is the variable display number controlled in the high base state, is replaced with the operation of the movable body 179SG300, and the speaker 8L, The display may be updated to "150 times" together with the sound output from the 8R and the light emission of the game effect lamp 9.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the feature unit 179SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (D), when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect, the front variable display suggestion effect is used. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the character effect is executed, and the suggestion effect is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 8-47 as a modified example 179SG-1, execution of a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display. Is set lower than the ratio for determining the execution of the character effect as the front variable display suggestion effect, and the front variable when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. It may be set to execute the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the display suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 179SG of the above-described embodiment, as a pre-reading notice, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 179SG005D and the second hold storage display area 179SG005U of the image display device 5 in a white square, star shape, or blue. Although a mode in which a hold display notice effect to be displayed in the mode of a red camera or a red camera can be executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. 8-48 (A) and FIG. 8-48 (A) as a modified example 179SG-2. As shown in FIG. 8-48 (B), when the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 179SG005D or the second hold storage display area 179SG005U, the image display device 5 displays the first hold storage display area 179SG005D. When the predetermined effect image 179SG005E overlaps with the second hold storage display area 179SG005U, at least the hold storage display in the form of a blue or red camera is displayed with priority over the effect image 179SG005E (blue or red camera). (Display so that the hold storage display of the embodiment is not concealed by the effect image 179SG005E). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the hold storage display of the blue or red camera mode due to the obstruction of the hold memory display of the blue or red camera mode by the effect image 179SG005E. be able to.

Further, in the feature unit 179SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of the super reach is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 8-49 (A) and 8-49 (B) as a modified example 179SG-3, the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds during the variable display of normal reach and non-reach without shortening. May be good. Further, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, the period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49 (C), is the special figure variation time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach. The setting suggestion effect may be executed for 3 seconds (3 seconds shorter than 3.75 seconds to 5.75 seconds).

Further, in the feature unit 179SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), the hold storage display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera and the mode of the red camera as the hold display notice effect. Although the embodiment in which the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different from that displayed in is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 179SG-4, the mode of the camera in which the hold memory display is blue. The determination ratio of at least one effect pattern in the setting suggestion effect may be different depending on whether it is displayed in the mode of the red camera or in the mode of the red camera. By doing so, the player can pay attention to whether the hold storage display is displayed in the form of the blue camera or the mode of the red camera as the hold display notice effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 179SG of the above-described embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of the variable display) are provided as start timings of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the variable display of the super reach. Although the embodiment in which the setting suggestion effect is more easily executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect by executing the rear variable display suggestion effect from the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 179SG- As a value 5, when the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is patterned at a higher rate than when the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 25 seconds after the start of the variable display. It may be executed with an effect pattern suggesting a high set value such as SS-3 to pattern SS-5. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 179SG of the embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed according to the effect executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display and the display mode of the hold memory display displayed as the hold display notice effect. Although a form suggesting whether or not to be performed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed as an effect executed as a suggestion effect during front variable display and a hold display notice effect. It may be suggested whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed only by one of the display mode of the hold storage display. Further, in the feature unit 179SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect during the variable display for executing the timer effect as the front variable display suggestion effect is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result of the variable display for executing the timer effect is a big hit, the setting suggestion effect is performed during the big hit game (advantageous state in the present invention) based on the variable display. May be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 179SG of the above-described embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is already executed, the mode of restricting the execution of the new hold display notice effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the hold display notice effect is already executed, the execution of only a part of the new hold display notice effects may be restricted. For example, if the hold display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), a new hold display notice effect is displayed. Only what is executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β (the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star) is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of hold display notice effects having different suggested contents. Further, when the hold display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ in this way, it is restricted that the new hold display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β. Therefore, the player can pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. In addition, if the hold display notice effect has already been executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β (when the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star), a new hold display notice effect is displayed. Whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit by limiting only what is executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (the hold memory display is displayed in the manner of a blue or red camera) The player can be even more noticed.

The feature unit 179SG of the above-described embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the hold display advance notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect is not limited thereto. As long as the effect can be executed from the timing before the variable display of the target starts, the effect other than the hold display notice effect may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 179SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a character effect and a timer effect can be executed as a suggestion effect during the front variable display suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, an effect other than the character effect or the timer effect may be executed as long as the effect suggests that the variable display result is a big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 179SG of the above-described embodiment, as the first high base state rush effect, the image display device 5 displays "100 times" which is the variable display number controlled to the high base state, and then the second high base state. As a base normal rush effect, a mode in which the display of "100 times" is updated to "150 times" is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first modification 179SG-6 is the first. As a high-base state rush effect, after displaying the variable display count controlled to the high-base state in the image display device 5 at the initial display of "0 times", the display of "0 times" is displayed as "100 times". You may update and display up to the display. In this case, as the second high base state rush effect, the update speed for updating the "100 times" display to "150 times" is updated to "100 times" for the above-mentioned "0 times" display. By making it slower than the update speed, it is possible to further emphasize that the high accuracy and high base state is controlled over a maximum of 150 variable displays, so that the second high base state rush effect is the first high base. It is possible to further reduce the deterioration of the game entertainment caused by the effect period being longer than the state rush effect.

Further, the feature unit 179SG of the above-described embodiment shows the operation of the movable body 179SG300 and the display of the ground color effect image 179SG005K on the image display device 5 and the jackpot as the jackpot confirmation notification effect that can be executed during the variable display. Although the form in which the stop display of the decorative symbol in combination and the stop display of the decorative symbol can be executed is illustrated, the jackpot confirmation notification effect that can be executed during the variable display may be a combination of other effects, or a jackpot. The definite notification effect may be simply a stop display of the decorative symbol in a combination indicating a big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 179SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-38 and 8-39, after the jackpot game of jackpot A is completed, only the first high base state rush effect is based on the process data of 1. After the jackpot game of jackpot B is completed, the first high base state rush effect and the second high base state rush effect are executed based on the process data of 1, but the present invention illustrates the mode. The present invention is not limited to this, and after the jackpot game of the jackpot B is completed, the first high base state rush effect and the second high base state rush effect may be executed based on different process data. By doing so, the first high base state rush effect can be executed after the big hit game of the big hit A and after the big hit game of the big hit B based on the common process data, so that the data capacity of the ROM 121 can be executed. Can be saved.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above and below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention has a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot A) that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state by performing variable display. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a plurality of advantageous states including (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot B).
The first period from the end of the advantageous state to the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times (for example, the period until the variable display is executed 50 times) and after the variable display of the predetermined number of times is executed. In a period including at least a second period (for example, a period during which the 51st to 100th or 51st to 150th variable display is executed), a special state (for example, high) in which the variable display is executed more frequently than the normal state. A game state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process) that can be controlled to a high accuracy base state),
When the variable display is executed, the first variable display period (for example, 43 seconds or 53 seconds, which is the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α or super reach β shown in FIG. 8-6) and the first variable From among a plurality of different variable display periods including the second variable display period (for example, 180 seconds which is the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ shown in FIG. 8-6) which is a period longer than the display period. A variable display period determining means for determining the variable display period of 1 (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 8-17) and
At least, a notification effect for notifying that the second advantageous state is controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37, as part of the jackpot confirmation notification effect, is movable with the display of the rainbow-colored effect image display 179SG005K. The part that operates the body 179SG300) is the first timing during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (B), the timing during 20 seconds from the start of the variable display to the reach). The second timing after the first timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (A)), the timing within 23 seconds or 33 seconds from the reach during the variable display to the end of the variable display. ), And a notification effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display), which can be executed at a plurality of different timings.
With
The notification effect executing means has a higher ratio when the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed in the first period than when it is executed in the second period. When the variable display executed based on the fact that the notification effect can be executed at the first timing and is controlled to the second advantageous state is executed in the second period, the first period It is possible to execute the notification effect at the second timing at a higher rate than when it is executed in (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (C)), the 1st to 50th variable in the high base state. When the variable display result is jackpot B in the display, the movable body 179SG300 always operates from the first timing, while in the high base state, when the variable display result is jackpot B in the 51st and subsequent variable displays. , The part where the movable body 179SG300 always operates from the second timing),
The variable display period determining means is higher when the variable display executed based on being controlled in the second advantageous state is executed in the first period than when it is executed in the second period. The second variable display period can be determined by a ratio, and when the variable display executed based on the control of the second advantageous state is executed in the second period, in the first period. The first variable display period can be determined at a higher rate than when it is being executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-17, the 1st to 50th variable display in the high base state. If the variable display result is jackpot B, the fluctuation pattern is always determined to be the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ by selecting the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, and it is variable in the 51st and subsequent variable displays in the high base state. When the display result is jackpot B, the fluctuation pattern is always determined to be one of normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β by selecting the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A).
further,
Specific display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that performs hold display or active display) capable of displaying specific display related to variable display on display means, and
It is provided with a change effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035) capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display.
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state (for example, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the hold display stage) changes up to the "red" stage). , The variable display result will always be a "big hit", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state in which a transition from the normal effect state can be performed and the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed). In that case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed),
The specific effect state is an effect state in which at least a part of the colors of the display target including the specific display displayed by the display means is displayed less than the normal effect state (for example, the effect). It is an effect of changing the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode by performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. It is a production that displays the number of colors to be performed with a smaller number of colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect is executed by the change effect executing means in the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is changed to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state. When the change effect is executed by the change effect means in the specific effect state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), the monochrome output process is performed, so even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, it is held regardless of the jackpot expectation. The display and active display are displayed in "white". On the other hand, in the normal effect state in which the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the expected degree according to the display mode change pattern),
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state (for example, in step 074AKS032 in a monochrome mode). The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target has returned to the normal number of colors, and the hold display and active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect are displayed in the changed display color), Be done.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an advantageous state from continuously occurring in a short period of time, and at the same time, to prevent an increase or delay in dissatisfaction due to a long variable display period. Further, the expectation degree notification by color can be suitably performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the display color of the specific display may indicate the type of advantageous state. For example, a display color that can be displayed only when a second advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is reached may be provided. By doing so, not only the expectation that the display color of the specific display will be controlled to the advantageous state, but also the expectation that the second advantageous state will be more advantageous can be expected, and the interest will be improved.

Further, the display ratio, the change ratio, and the like of the color displayed as the specific display may be different between the first period and the second period after the end of the advantageous state. For example, by increasing the rate of change to the display color with a high degree of expectation that is controlled to the advantageous state in the second period, it can be suggested that the display color is controlled to the advantageous state in the latter half, and the interest is improved. ..

Further, the display color (common display color regardless of the degree of expectation) of the specific display in the specific effect state (special state) may be different between the first period and the second period after the end of the advantageous state. For example, when the monochrome effect is executed in the specific effect state (special state), the display color of the specific display in the monochrome effect may be different between the first period and the second period. By doing so, the display color of the specific display in the specific effect state will be different between the first period and the second period, so that the interest of the game in the special state can be further improved.
Further, when shifting from the first period to the second period after the end of the advantageous state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in the display color according to the expectation degree only for a predetermined short time, and then the expectation degree is not related. You may return to the common display color. By doing so, when shifting from the first period to the second period, the effect related to the expectation of the specific display is performed only for a predetermined short time, so that in the specific effect state (special state). The interest is improved.

Further, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving the interest, a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Specific display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that performs hold display or active display) capable of displaying specific display related to variable display on display means, and
It is provided with a change effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of 074AKS035) capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display.
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state (for example, when the active display (including the case where it changes at the hold display stage) changes up to the "red" stage). , The variable display result will always be a "big hit", etc.),
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state in which a transition from the normal effect state can be performed and the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state (for example, a monochrome effect is executed). In that case, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed),
The specific effect state is an effect state in which at least a part of the colors of the display target including the specific display displayed by the display means is displayed less than the normal effect state (for example, the effect). It is an effect of changing the target image displayed on the image display device 3 to a monochrome mode by performing monochrome output processing on the control board 12 side, and is used when displaying a pre-stored effect image. It is a production that displays the number of colors to be performed with a smaller number of colors than the normal production state),
When the change effect is executed by the change effect executing means in the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is changed to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state. When the change effect is executed by the change effect means in the specific effect state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state. (For example, during the specific effect state (when the monochrome effect flag is on), the monochrome output process is performed, so even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, it is held regardless of the jackpot expectation. The display and active display are displayed in "white". On the other hand, in the normal effect state in which the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display color is displayed according to the expected degree according to the display mode change pattern),
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state (for example, in step 074AKS032 in a monochrome mode). The number of colors used for the target image that was the display target has returned to the normal number of colors, and the hold display and active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect are displayed in the changed display color), Be done. A form example of this game machine will be described below as another form example.

(Explanation of features related to set values)
Hereinafter, the feature portion related to the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

Although not shown, the main board 11 of the pachinko game machine 1 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. ing. Further, although not shown, the main board 11 has a lock switch for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, and a jackpot which will be described later in the set value change state. A setting changeover switch that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value such as a winning probability (ball output rate) and an open sensor that detects the opening of a gaming machine frame are provided. The set value change state in the present embodiment is also a state in which the staff of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

Operation units such as these lock switches and setting changeover switches that can be operated by the staff of the amusement park and the like are provided in the setting changeover main body unit and are housed in the board case together with the main board 11. The lock switch and the setting changeover switch are exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case so that the lock switch and the setting changeover switch can be operated without opening the board case.

A board case containing a lock switch and a setting changeover switch is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the lock switch and the setting changeover switch are extremely difficult or impossible to operate when the game machine frame is closed, and can be operated by opening the game machine frame using a predetermined door key. .. Further, since the lock switch requires the operation of the setting key possessed by the staff of the game hall or the like, only the administrator who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch. The lock switch is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation by a setting key. In the present embodiment, the mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

A display monitor capable of displaying set values and base values is arranged on the board case. The display monitor is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case. That is, the display monitor is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case when visually recognizing it. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame is opened. This is the front of the pachinko machine 1 and is different from the front of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, the display monitor is arranged in front of the game board 2 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized when the frame for the game machine is open. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

The display monitor includes a first display unit, a second display unit, a third display unit, and a fourth display unit. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. .. The first display unit to the fourth display unit of the display monitor can be lit or blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

A game information display unit may be provided as a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, at a lower left position of the game area. A round display, a right-handed lamp, a probability change lamp, and a time saving lamp are collectively arranged in the game information display unit. The round display can display the number of rounds and the type of big hit in the big hit game during the big hit game. The right-handed lamp lights up in a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area, such as a low-accuracy high-base state as a time-saving state or a big hit game state. The probabilistic lamp lights up when it is in the probabilistic state. The time saving lamp lights up when the time saving state is reached. The round display is composed of 5 segments (LEDs).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured such that the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. The set value is composed of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. Further, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the game field side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the game field side. If the ball output rate changes according to the set value, for example, the jackpot probability may change depending on the set value, and although the jackpot probability is constant, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state changes depending on the set value. May be good. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that any one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

9-1 (A) and 9-1 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. Of these, FIG. 9-1 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 9-2 (A) shows the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when the figure is the second special figure is shown. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 for each set value is set as a variable display result (special figure display result) of a special symbol. Is. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. The hit determination value in the display result determination table is also assigned to the special figure display result in the range of 0 to 65535. The display result judgment table is not limited to the one using individual display result judgment tables for the first special figure and the second special figure, and the display result judgment common to the first special figure and the second special figure. A table may be used.

Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the display result is 1020 to 1346. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result when the game state is the probabilistic state in the case where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, 1020 to Up to 1383 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1383. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1429. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1487. Are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses".

Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1556. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "misses". Among the cases where the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the display result is 1020 to 1674. Is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

In each display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are the special figures of "big hit". It is assigned to the display result. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined (for example, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1 / when the set value is 4). Compared to 240, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher. (For example, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, 1/160 when the set value is 3, 1/140 when the set value is 4, and the set value is When it is 5, it is 1/120, and when the set value is 6, it is 1/100). Each display so that the probability of being determined to control the jackpot gaming state is higher when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability changing state (high probability state) than in the normal state or the time saving state. In the result determination table, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

The magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different according to each set value (for example, if the setting value is 1, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state). Is 1.5 times, and if the set value is 2, the ratio of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is about 1.56 times, and if the setting value is 3, the normal state or the time saving state The magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in is not limited to 1.625 times), and the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value. The multiples of the jackpot probability in the above may be set to be constant (for example, 5 times).

In each first special figure display result determination table, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment value is assigned. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is set to 1/200. On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/100.

Regardless of the set value, the special figure display result is not limited to the form in which the probability determined to control the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same probability, and the special figure display result is displayed according to the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state as a "small hit" may be different. It is not limited to the form in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state by setting the special figure display result as "small hit" according to the variable special map is different, and the special figure display result is " The probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

Focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result judgment table, in the display result judgment table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. , The range from 1024 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. As described above, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1 among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, While only the numbers in the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is " It is assigned to "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is a small hit for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the case where the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in the range of 32767 to 33094. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a common numerical range of the big hit judgment values for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. Is set to. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range While only the numerical values in (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range becomes "big hit". Assigned. The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, 32767 of the hit determination values are the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. The range from ~ 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the case where the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit determination value in the range of 32767 to 33094. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of the hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively. In this way, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1 among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, While only the numbers in the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is " It is assigned to "big hit". The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is a small hit for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the judgment value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the big hit when the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1346), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values in the range of 32767 to 33421. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a common numerical range of the big hit judgment values for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. Is set to. When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020-1346 is assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 to set. In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively. As described above, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, when the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( While only the numerical values in 1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", when the set value is 2 or more, the numerical value in the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range is assigned to "big hit". Has been done. The non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases. Therefore, the jackpot probability becomes higher as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value (big hit reference value) of the jackpot judgment value. I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, among the hit determination values, as in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. The range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, in this case, 102 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, while the small hit judgment value is the big hit when the set value is 6. In a numerical range different from the range of determination values (1020 to 1674), 32767 is set as a reference value (small hit reference value) for small hit determination values in the range of 32767 to 33421. As a result, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In each display result judgment table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the judgment included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range with the hit judgment value 1020 as a reference. The value is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 (common numerical range) based on the hit judgment value of 32767 is used as the small hit judgment regardless of the game state and the set value. The variable display result is judged as the numerical range of the value.

In each display result judgment table, when the fluctuation special figure is the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same). is there. In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

In each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" is the lowest, and the value of the set value is Judgment values are assigned so that the larger the value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state (big hit probability: setting value 6> setting value 5> setting value 4> setting). Value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1). The CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when the random number value MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. In this way, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 9-1 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

The setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are not limited to a total of 6 setting values 1 to 6, and the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 5 or less. It may be 7 or more. The larger the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the probability of big hits increases, the specific big hit type can be easily determined, etc.), and the pachinko game is not limited to the form. The smaller the set value set in the machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

While the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game playability itself is not limited to a form that does not change, and the game is played according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The sex may change. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as the effect switch (to execute the predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area. When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (for controlling the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

Next, the processing in the game control main processing in the feature unit related to the set value will be described. FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed in the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. The processing in the game control main processing is, for example, in the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, after the interrupt is set to prohibit, the stack pointer is set, the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc. ), The setting for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like may be executed after the initial setting is performed.

When the processing in the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko game machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (Step S1A). Before the process of step S1A, a process of clearing the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear process has been executed according to a predetermined condition may be performed.

When the clear switch is ON (step S1A; Yes), the RAM clear flag is set (step S2A) and the process proceeds to step S3A. When the clear switch is OFF (step S1A; No), step S2A The process proceeds to step S3A without executing the process of.

In step S3A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch is ON (step S3A). When the lock switch is ON (step S3A; Yes), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor is ON (step S4A). When the release sensor is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch ON and the game machine frame open (step S4A; Yes), is the RAM clear flag set? Whether or not it is determined (step S5A).

When the RAM clear flag is set (step S5A), the set value change process (step S6A) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to the process of step S8A. When the RAM clear flag is not set (step A5A; No), the set value confirmation process (step S7A) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to perform the process of step S8A. move on. If the lock switch is OFF (step S3A; No) or the release sensor is OFF (step S4A; No), the process proceeds to step S8A as it is.

The setting value change process is performed by turning on the lock switch and the clear switch while the gaming machine frame is open when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted. This is the process to be performed. In the set value change process, a process of transmitting a set value change start notification command to the effect control board 12, a process of updating the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 as a temporary set value based on the operation of the setting changeover switch, A process of updating and storing a temporary set value as an actual set value at the address F000 in the RAM 102 and a process of transmitting a set value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 are performed according to the state of the lock switch.

In the set value confirmation process, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (power cut) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on (the clear switch is off) with the gaming machine frame open. It is a process performed by doing. In the set value confirmation process, a process of transmitting a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12, a display of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is started on the display monitor, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. The process of outputting a security signal to a management device such as a management computer of a game hall via a terminal board (not shown), the display or the like is terminated according to the state of the lock switch, and the setting is set for the effect control board 12. The process of sending the value confirmation end notification command is performed.

In the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the round display are turned on from the start of each process, and the first hold display 25A, By starting the second hold display 25B and the blinking of the right-handed lamp, the player, the staff of the game hall, etc. are changing or setting the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. It suffices if it is possible to recognize that the value is being confirmed. Further, the lighting pattern of the segment constituting the round display may be any mode as long as it does not correspond to any of the plurality of jackpot types. Further, the segments constituting the round display may be lit in different modes at the start of the set value change process and the start of the set value confirmation process.

In step S8A, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time. (Step S8A). If the RAM clear flag is set (step S8A; Yes), the RAM clear process (step S9A) is executed and then the process proceeds to step S10A. If the RAM clear flag is not set (step S8A; No), the RAM is cleared. The process proceeds to step S10A without executing the process (step S9A). Then, as another process, for example, depending on whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, the CPU 103 recovers whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start or in a state before the power failure (starts by a hot start). ), Performs processing according to each (step S10A), and ends the processing in the game control main processing.

In the RAM clear processing, data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag is cleared by storing "00H" in an address other than the first address (F000) in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored. Processing is done. In the RAM clear processing, instead of clearing the data other than the set value, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the predetermined address of the RAM 102 (the address F000 in the feature unit 048AK of the present embodiment). It may be possible to clear only the game information stored in (F003 or later of ~ FXXX).

The process of step S10A includes a process of blinking all the segments constituting the display monitor for a period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, only a part of the segments may be blinked, or at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor may be turned on. Further, in the processing in the game control main processing, for example, based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error), the recovery from the power failure during the setting change, and the like. A process of transmitting an error designation command according to an abnormality of the set value to the effect control board 12 may be included. Further, as a notification (error notification) of the occurrence of an abnormal setting value error or recovery from a power failure during setting change, the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display that constitute the display monitor are displayed. A process of displaying "E." may be performed in each of the parts. Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and manages the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a computer, and thereafter, the CPU 103 displays until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall). The occurrence notification of an error may be executed by the monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the process in the game control main process, when the lock switch is determined to be ON in step S3A and then the release sensor is determined to be OFF in step S4A, the opening of the game machine frame is detected. Since the operation of the lock switch is detected without this, an error designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 and an error notification may be performed by a display monitor or the like. The process of step S10A may include a process of transmitting a set value notification command to the effect control board 12. The set value notification command may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the process of step S10A regardless of whether or not the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. As a result, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the set value can be identifiable and stored regardless of whether or not the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 is changed. it can.

When an abnormal set value is set or when the power failure during the change of the set value is restored, the display monitor, the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special symbol display device 4B notify the occurrence of an error. By executing the above, the staff of the game hall can recognize that the pachinko game machine 1 has recovered from the occurrence of an error or the power failure during the change of the set value from both the front side and the back side. .. In addition, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved by making it possible for the management device of the game hall to recognize the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value. Will be.

As described above, the display result determination table included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 9-1, up to 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values regardless of the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The range of is set as a common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6 (when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1), the value corresponding to each set value is set from 1238. The range up to is set as a non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 2 to 6, the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value are continuous with the hit judgment value 1020 as the big hit reference value. Since it is set to be in a numerical range, when determining whether or not it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the value of the random number MR1 is from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to each set value. It may be determined whether or not it is within the numerical range up to. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

Since the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value within the range of 0 to 65535 is set at one place with 1020 as the reference value, it is disturbed as compared with the case where a plurality of numerical ranges of the advantageous state judgment value are provided. It is not necessary to determine whether or not the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the jackpot determination value (whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state) multiple times. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls in an advantageous state.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, in the display result determination table, the jackpot determination is performed using the hit determination value of 1020 as the jackpot reference value regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability variation state. Since the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the values are set to be continuous numerical ranges, when determining whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is Whether it is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the normal state or the time saving state, and whether it is within the range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range according to the probabilistic state. It may be judged whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, in the display result judgment table, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. (While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the first special figure display result judgment table is 328, the small hit judgment value in the second special figure display result judgment table The number of judgment values included in the numerical range of is 655, which is about twice.) On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value). Therefore, when determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the value of the random number MR1 is within the numerical range from 32767 to the maximum value of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. It suffices to judge whether or not it is. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, the numerical range of the small hit determination value in the display result determination table is the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is set to a numerical range (32767 to 33094 or 32767 to 33421) different from the numerical range of the judgment value of the jackpot in the case of 6. Therefore, when determining whether or not the game is controlled by the jackpot game state, it is determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the numerical range from 1020 to the maximum value of the non-common numerical range corresponding to each set value. When determining whether or not the small hit game state is controlled, the random number value MR1 is within the range from 32767 to the maximum value of the numerical range of the small hit determination value according to the fluctuation special chart. It may be determined whether or not. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the big hit game state and the processing load for determining whether or not the CPU 103 controls the small hit game state.

(Explanation of feature 74AK)
Next, the feature portion 074AK of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 074AK of the present embodiment, as a look-ahead notice effect, a change effect is performed to change the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 074AK, any type of image including an image that notifies at least the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state by a color type, such as a variable display compatible display, is set in a monochrome mode. It is possible to execute a monochrome effect that makes it invisible to the player whether it is displayed in the color of (which is the display color of the expected degree). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 074AK of the present embodiment, when the change effect is executed during the execution of the monochrome effect, the display color of the variable display compatible display is displayed in a common color regardless of the degree of expectation. When the monochrome effect is completed, it becomes possible to visually recognize which expected display color is. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 074AK having such features will be described. The same parts as those described in the above basic explanation will be omitted.

Further, a state in which a monochrome effect is being executed is referred to as a monochrome effect state or a specific effect state, and a state in which a monochrome effect is not being executed may be referred to as a normal effect state. Further, in the monochrome effect state in this embodiment, the background image is also in a monochrome mode, and is expressed only by shades of black. In the monochrome effect state (specific effect state), the image may be displayed in shades of red or blue in addition to shades of black, or may be black on a green background or black on a red background. Furthermore, if the degree of expectation by color is unrecognizable and the number of colors used is smaller than in the normal production state (unless it is full color), the entire display is not limited to monochrome, for example, the background. A part may be displayed in monochrome (shades of black) and the other part may be displayed in two colors (a specific color such as yellow is displayed in that color, and the other parts are displayed in that color). It may be displayed in shades of black). Further, in the monochrome effect, the target image displayed on the image display device 3 is changed to the monochrome mode by performing the monochrome output process on the effect control board 12 side when the execution of the monochrome effect is started. This is an effect, in which the number of colors used when displaying a pre-stored effect image is displayed with a smaller number of colors than in the normal effect state. In other words, it does not store other data such as a production image for monochrome production, and while the monochrome production is being executed (during a specific production state), the target image such as hold display or active display is subject to change production. It is displayed in monochrome mode regardless of whether it was damaged or not.

FIG. 10-1 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of FIG. When the start winning prize determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first starting port switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is on (). Step S201). When it is determined that the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes) because it is determined that the first start port switch 22A is on in the switch processing, the CPU 103 sets the first special drawing. It is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved stored number of the special figure game used, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 is the first stored value of the first special figure reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the first special figure reserved storage number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the first special figure reserved storage number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved storage number count value. When it is determined in step S202 that the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is not the upper limit value (step S202; No), the CPU 103 stores the start port buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control buffer setting unit, etc.). The starting port buffer value, which is a value, is set to "1" (step S203).

When it is determined in step S201 that the first start port switch 22A is off (step S201; No), or when it is determined in step S202 that the number of reserved first special figure has reached the upper limit value (step S202; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is on (step S204). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is on in the switch processing, for example, the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on (step S204; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the second special figure. It is determined whether or not the second special figure reserved memory number, which is the reserved stored number of the special figure game used, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 is a second stored value of a second special figure reserved storage number counter (counter for counting the second special figure reserved storage number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the second special figure reserved storage number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved storage number count value. When it is determined in step S205 that the number of reserved second special figure is not the upper limit value (step S205; No), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value to "2" (step S206). When it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is not on (step S204; No), or when it is determined that the second special figure reserved storage number is the upper limit value (step S205; Yes), the CPU 103 determines. Start The winning prize determination process ends.

After executing either the process of step S203 or S206, the CPU 103 updates so as to add 1 to the special figure reserved storage count value according to the start port buffer value (step S207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the 1st special figure hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the 2nd special figure hold memory count value is added. Add 1 In this way, the 1st special figure reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the 1st start winning opening and the 1st start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the 1st special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). In addition, the second special figure reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). At this time, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.), is updated so as to be added by 1 (step S208).

After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number for determining the special figure display result is determined from the numerical data updated by the random number counter or the like provided in the predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted. Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored as hold data by being set at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit. At this time, when the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 can control the first hold indicator 25A to specify the number of the first special figure hold storage added by one. The display may be performed by the first hold indicator 25A (for example, the number of LEDs lit by one is increased). When the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display a display capable of specifying the number of the second special figure hold storage added by one. The second hold indicator 25B may be made to perform (for example, increase the number of LEDs lit by one).

The first special figure holding storage unit is a special figure game (first special figure game) in which the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first starting winning is generated, but the game has not been started yet. The hold data of the special figure game) using the first special figure in the symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the first starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 are stored as pending data. Is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes stored information.

It should be noted that the hold number of the first special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "1", the hold display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the first hold display unit 5HL. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "2", the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the first hold display unit 5HL. To do.

The second special figure holding storage unit is a special figure game (second) that has not been started yet, although the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning is generated. The reserved data of the special figure game) using the second special figure in the special symbol display device 4B is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the second starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like are set as pending data, and the numbers are Storage is performed until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. In this way, the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game. Hold that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on (special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, reach effect). It becomes stored information.

The hold number of the second special figure hold storage unit and the display position of the hold display symbol (controlled by the effect control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "1", the hold display symbol is displayed at the first display position on the leftmost side of the second hold display unit 5HR. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number "2", the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the second hold display unit 5HR. To do.

After executing the process of step S210, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the start port winning designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S211). After that, the CPU 103 makes a setting for transmitting the hold storage number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 (step S212).

Subsequently, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number value determination process (step S213). As described above, the winning random number value determination process is a process for determining the starting winning value, and the random number value is based on the random number values MR1 and MR3 of the random number values MR1 to 3 extracted in step S209. This is a process for determining whether or not the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target is a “big hit” or a “small hit” and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 10-4). After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the start port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S214). At this time, if it is determined that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S214; "2"), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (). Step S215), the start winning determination process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is "1" (step S214; "1"), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0". (Step S216), the process proceeds to step S204. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S213 of FIG. 10-1 as the winning random number value determination process. In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is set as "big hit" or "small hit" by the special symbol normal processing, and the big hit game. A decision is made as to whether or not to control the state or the small hit game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern corresponding to the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the winning random number value determination process, the game ball is extracted at the starting winning timing detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening) at this timing. Judgment as to whether or not the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target of the randomized value (random value extracted in the process of step S209) is "big hit" or "small hit", and variable display of the decorative symbol. It determines which fluctuation pattern will be (so-called "look-ahead"). As a result, the special symbol display result becomes "big hit" before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started (before the start condition of the special symbol game is satisfied). It is pre-read that it will be a "small hit" and that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be the predetermined display mode, and based on this pre-reading result, the effect control board 12 will hold the display by the effect control CPU 120 or the like. The display mode and the like can be determined.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 first, for example, has a time saving flag (a flag that turns on when in the time saving state) provided in a predetermined area (game control flag setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102. ) And the state of the probability change flag (the flag that is turned on when the probability change state is reached) to specify the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S301). The CPU 103 determines whether or not the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the jackpot gaming state by checking the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control flag control unit, etc.). To identify. For example, when the value of the special figure process flag is "4" to "7", it may be specified that the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the jackpot gaming state.

Following the process of step S301, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the specified gaming state is in the jackpot gaming state (step S302). When it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (step S302; No), the CPU 103 further determines whether or not the high base is in the high open control accompanying the time reduction control in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S303). ). When it is determined that the base is high (step S303; Yes), or when it is determined that the jackpot is in the process of step S302 (step S402; Yes), the CPU 103 has a start port buffer value of "2". It is determined whether or not there is (step S304). When it is determined that the start port buffer value is not "2" (step S304; No), the CPU 103 makes a setting for limiting the determination at the time of winning (step S306).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S304; Yes), or when it is determined that the high base is not in the process of step S303 (step S303; No), the CPU 103 is shown in FIG. From the 1st special figure display result determination table or the 2nd special figure display result determination table shown in 11 (A) and (B), the start port buffer value (“1” or “2”) and the current gaming state are supported. The special figure display result determination table used for determining the special figure display result is selected (step S305).

Following the process of step S305, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307). The CPU 103 compares, for example, the individual determination values included in the jackpot determination range with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by the process of step S209 shown in FIG. 10-1 one by one. It may be determined whether or not there is a determined value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it may be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, if it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it is determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit" (big hit start determination). it can.

In the process of step S307, for example, the CPU 103 may read the random number value MR1 stored in the special figure reservation storage unit in step S210, and perform the above determination using the read random number value MR1. Further, the CPU 103 holds the random number value MR1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (an area other than the special figure reservation storage unit) or a storage area of the CPU 103 separately from the step S210, and makes the above determination based on the held random number value. May be done. This also applies to the random number value MR3 described later. As described above, the random number value used in the winning random number value determination process does not have to be the random number value stored in the special figure holding storage unit.

When it is determined in the process of step S307 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range (step S307; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S308). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the jackpot type determination table. The CPU 103 determines which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data.

Following the process of step S308, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 10-5) prepared in advance by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 and sets it in the table to be used (step). S309). The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining a variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result becomes a “big hit”, and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern.

In the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-5, the determination ratio is described instead of the range of determination values. In the actual table, it is sufficient that the determination values in the range corresponding to the determination ratio of FIG. 10-5 are assigned to each fluctuation pattern. The determination ratio is a ratio in which the entire range (1 to 900) of the values that the random number value MR3 can take is set to 100. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), when the jackpot type is probabilistic / non-probable, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern PB1-1 is 5, the determination rate of the variation pattern PB1-2 is 25, and the variation pattern. Since the determination ratio of PB1-3 is 70, the variation pattern PB1-1 is assigned a determination value 1 to 45 (range of 5%) to be compared with the random number value MR3, and the variation pattern PB1-2 is assigned a random number value. A decision value of 46 to 270 (range of 25%) to be compared with MR3 is assigned, and a decision value of 271 to 900 (range of 70%) to be compared with the random value MR3 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PB1-3. The allocation of such a decision value is the same for other tables in which the decision ratio is described.

When it is determined in the process of step S307 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S307; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step). S310). The CPU 103 executes the same processing as in the case of the big hit determination range for the determination value assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" in the special figure display result determination table selected by the process of step S305. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range.

When it is determined that the small hit is within the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (see FIG. 10-5 (B)). Is selected and set in the usage table (step S312). The small hit fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variable display fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is "small hit", and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the table is not within the small hit determination range (step S310; No), a loss variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (FIGS. 10-5 (C), (See (D)) is selected and set in the usage table (step S311). Specifically, when the current gaming state specified in step S301 is a non-time saving state (low base state) (when the time saving flag is off), the loss fluctuation pattern of FIG. 10-5 (C) is determined. When the table is set as the table to be used and the current gaming state specified in step S301 is the time saving state (high base state) (when the time saving flag is on), the loss variation in FIG. 10-5 (D) Set the pattern determination table to the used table. The loss variation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variation pattern of the variable display in which the variable display result becomes "loss", and a determination value to be compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each variation pattern.

After executing any of steps S309, S311, and S312, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot fluctuation pattern set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted in step S209. The variation pattern assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value MR3 is determined by referring to any one of the table, the small hit variation pattern determination table, and the loss variation pattern determination table (step S313). The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern by, for example, comparing the individual determination values assigned to each variation pattern with the random number value MR3 one by one to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR3. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value assigned to each fluctuation pattern, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR3 and the minimum value of the determination value. Or the fluctuation pattern may be determined by comparing with the maximum value.

After executing any of the processes of steps S306 and S313, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the start winning command according to the determination result of step S308 or step S313 (step S314), and determines the random value at the time of winning. To finish. The start winning command is composed of a starting opening winning designation command, a special figure hold storage number designation command, a symbol judgment result designation command, and a variation pattern judgment result designation command. When the start opening buffer value is "1", the first start winning opening designation command, the first special figure hold storage number designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation are used as start winning commands. Set the command and send. When the start opening buffer value is "2", the second start winning opening designation command, the second special figure hold storage number designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation are used as start winning commands. Set the command and send. The command set for transmission is transmitted in the command control process.

The 1st special figure reserved storage number specification command and the 2nd special figure reserved storage number specification command to be set for transmission are commands for specifying the current 1st special figure reserved storage number and the 2nd special figure reserved storage number (to the stored number). The command including the corresponding EXT data) may be specified, and the number of special figure reserved storage to be specified may be specified by the count value of the first special figure reserved storage number counter or the second special figure reserved storage number counter. When the determination result in step S307 is within the jackpot determination range (step S307; Yes), the symbol specification command to be set for transmission is a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is "big hit" (to "big hit"). A command that includes the corresponding EXT data), and when the determination result in step S307 is within the small hit determination range (step S310; Yes), a command that specifies that the determination result of the variable display result is "small hit" ("" A command that includes EXT data corresponding to "small hit"), and when the judgment result in step S310 is not within the small hit determination range (step S310; No), a command that specifies that the judgment result of the variable display result is "missing". (A command including EXT data corresponding to "loss"), and when the judgment result in step S303 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S304; No), the judgment at the time of starting winning is not performed "No judgment". It may be a command that specifies that (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to "no judgment"). The variation pattern determination result specification command to be set for transmission is a command for specifying the variation pattern that is the determination result when the variation pattern is determined in step S313 (a command that includes EXT data corresponding to the variation pattern that is the determination result). When the determination result in step S304 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S304; No), the command (EXT corresponding to "no determination") that specifies that the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed is "no determination". It can be a command that includes data).

In the winning random number value determination process, as described above, regarding the variable display corresponding to the random number values MR1 to 3 extracted in step S209 this time, the variable display result of the variable display (special figure game) is "big hit" or "small". Whether or not it becomes a "hit" and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 10-5) are determined, and so-called look-ahead is performed. In this process, the determination is made based on the current gaming state, and the determination is not made based on the gaming state when the variable display is actually executed. Therefore, the determination is not always accurate, but to some extent. Variable display results and fluctuation patterns can be predicted with accuracy. Further, in the winning random number value determination process, the start is started by the process of step S304 based on the case where it is determined that the big hit is being made in the process of step S302 or the time reduction control is being performed in the process of step S303. It is determined whether or not the mouth buffer value is "2". At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" and not "2", the process proceeds to step S314 without executing the process such as step S305, and the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed. In this way, when the high opening control accompanying the time saving control is performed or when the big hit game state is performed, each of the above is based on the occurrence of the start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the first start prize opening. Limit the judgment so that it is not made. As a result, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, and the time reduction control is in progress or the jackpot game state is in effect, the first start prize is won. It is possible to ensure the soundness of the game by limiting the pre-reading based on the above.

FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in FIG. When the variation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S261). When it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the jackpot when the special figure display result is "big hit" (step S262). When it is determined in the process of step S261 that the big hit flag is in the off state (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit flag is in the on state (step S263). When it is determined that the small hit flag is on (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern corresponding to the small hit when the special figure display result is "small hit" (step S264). On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag is in the off state (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result is "loss" according to the number of reserved storages. (Step S265).

FIG. 10-4 shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern in this embodiment.

The variation pattern PA1-1 is selected when the variable display result is "missing", specifies non-reach (the variable display mode does not become the reach mode), and has a normal special figure variation time. It is a non-reach variation pattern of length. The fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern selected when the number of reserved storages is less than 2.

The fluctuation pattern PA1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "missing", specifies non-reach (the variable display mode does not become the reach mode), and the special figure fluctuation time is longer than usual. Is also a short (shortening variation) non-reach variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern selected when the number of reserved storages is 2 or more.

The variation pattern PA2-1 is selected when the variable display result is “missing”, and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PA2-2 is selected when the variable display result is “missing”, and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of the super reach A. The variation pattern PA2-3 is selected when the variable display result is “missing”, and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of the super reach B.

The variation pattern PB1-1 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach variation pattern that specifies execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PB1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit", and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of super reach A. The variation pattern PB1-3 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit", and is a reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of the super reach B.

The variable pattern PC1-1 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability", and when the variable display result is "small hit", and specifies non-reach. It is a non-reach fluctuation pattern. The variable pattern PC1-2 is selected when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "sudden probability", and when the variable display result is "small hit", and is exclusively for sudden / small hit. A reach variation pattern that specifies the execution of reach. Here, the reach for exclusive use of the sudden / small hit is a reach that can be selected and determined only when the variable display result is the sudden big hit or the small hit. The decorative symbol for the sudden jackpot is a symbol in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is stopped and displayed at "3", "5", and "7". The decorative symbol for small hits is a symbol in which the combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is stopped and displayed at "2", "4", and "6".

In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 10-3, for example, the fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-5 (A) stored in advance in the predetermined area of ROM 101. Will be done. As an example, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer, and thereby assigns the variation assigned to the determination value matching the random number value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the current fluctuation pattern. In FIG. 10-5 (A), the determination ratio is shown instead of the determination value.

In the process of step S264 shown in FIG. 10-3, for example, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a small hit is used by using the small hit fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Is determined. As an example, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 is assigned to a determined value that matches the random number value MR3 by referring to the small hit variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern read from the random number buffer for variation. The fluctuation pattern may be determined (selected) as the current fluctuation pattern. In addition, in FIG. 10-5 (B), the determination ratio is described instead of the determination value.

In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 10-3, for example, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10-5 (C) and 10-5 (D), which is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, is used at the time of loss. The fluctuation pattern is determined. When the gaming state is the non-time saving state (time saving flag is off), the CPU 103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-5 (C). When the game state is the time saving state (time saving flag is on), the CPU 103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-5 (D). As an example, in each loss fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103 refers to the loss variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer, and thereby assigns the variation assigned to the determination value matching the random number value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the current fluctuation pattern. In addition, in FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, at the time of big hit (probability change / non-probability change), the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern PB1-3 that executes the super reach B is the highest, and the fluctuation pattern PB1-2 and the normal reach of the super reach A are the highest. The determination rate gradually decreases in the order of the fluctuation pattern PB1-1. At the time of loss, the determination rate of the non-reach variation pattern PA1-1 (including PA1-2) is the highest, and the normal reach variation pattern PA2-1, the super reach A variation pattern PA2-2, and the super reach B are determined. The determination rate gradually decreases in the order of the fluctuation pattern PA2-3. From this, when Super Reach B is executed, the variable display result becomes a "big hit" at the highest rate. Then, in the order of Super Reach A and Normal Reach, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (so-called big hit expectation) decreases. That is, the variable display in which the reach effect of the super reach is performed has a higher ratio of the variable display result being a "big hit" than the variable display in which the reach effect is not performed. In other words, the longer the variable display period (variable display time), the higher the proportion of the variable display result being a "big hit".

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5, at the time of big hit (sudden probability), the determination ratio of the variation pattern PC1-2 of the collision / small hit reach is higher than the determination ratio of the non-reach variation pattern PC1-1. On the other hand, at the time of small hit, the determination ratio of the non-reach fluctuation pattern PC1-1 is higher than the determination ratio of the sudden / small hit reach fluctuation pattern PC1-2. From this, when the variation pattern PC1-2 of the sudden / small hit reach is executed, the variable display result tends to be “big hit (abrupt probability)”, and when the non-reach variation pattern PC1-1 is executed, The variable display result tends to be a "small hit".

After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, and S265 of FIG. 10-3, the CPU 103 sets the special figure fluctuation time (also referred to as fluctuation time), which is the variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. Is. As shown in FIG. 12, the special figure fluctuation time is predetermined in accordance with a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in each of the processes of steps S262, S264, and S265. The special figure fluctuation time is set, for example, by setting a timer value according to the special figure fluctuation time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Following the process of step S266, the start of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. A setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games for which the conditions are satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. As a result, the special figure game is started. When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold display 25A to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted 1st special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25A may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one). When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold display 25B to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted second special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25B may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one).

After executing the process of step S267, the CPU 103 issues a command at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (command at the start of fluctuation) in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the special symbol display result, the determination result of the fluctuation pattern, and the like. Transmission settings are made (step S268). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends the first fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( A command including EXT data indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in steps S262, S264, or S265), a display result specification command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a first special figure hold storage number specification command (command containing EXT data indicating the determined variable display result). The 1-decreased 1st special figure hold storage count value, that is, the command including the EXT data indicating the 1st special figure hold storage when one hold memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially transmitted. Set the transmission settings for this. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends the second fluctuation start designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the fluctuation start command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 ( A command including EXT data indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in steps S262, S264 or S265), a display result specification command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a second special figure hold storage number specification command (1). The decremented second special figure reserved memory count value, that is, the command including the EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory when one reserved memory is exhausted by the start of execution of the special figure game) is sequentially transmitted. Set the transmission settings for.

After executing the process of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to "2" (step S267), and then ends the variation pattern setting process. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in step S267, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 5 is executed.

Next, the processing of the feature unit 074AK on the effect control board 12 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 10-6 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning command (start winning opening designation command, special figure hold storage number designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command) from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not it was present (step S401).

When it is determined that the start winning command has been received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the starting winning command buffer (step S402). When the 1st start winning opening designation command or the 1st special figure hold storage number designation command is received as the start winning command, the start winning command (1st start winning opening designation command, 1st special figure hold storage number designation command) , The symbol determination result specification command, the variation pattern determination result specification command) are stored in the first start winning command buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122. When a second start winning opening designation command or a second special figure hold storage number designation command is received as a start winning command, a start winning command (second start winning opening designation command, second special figure hold storage number designation command) , The symbol determination result specification command, the variation pattern determination result specification command) are stored in the second start winning command buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122.

FIG. 10-7 (A) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of the first start winning. In the first start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the starting winning command received at the time of the first starting winning is stored. The command buffer at the time of winning the first start corresponds to each of the storage areas (hold display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the number of hold storages in the first special figure. Area to be used) is provided. As shown in the figure, the command buffer at the time of the first start winning in the feature unit 074AK in this embodiment has an area in which various command data corresponding to the variable display during execution are stored as the hold display number “0”. Is provided (the same applies to the command buffer at the time of winning the second start).

When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening, 4 commands, 1st starting winning opening designation command, 1st special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and variation pattern judgment result designation command, are 1 The set effect control command (command at the time of starting winning) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, in addition to these first start winning opening designation command, first special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command, and other information are held. A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data for specifying the start winning command from the beginning of the free area of the first start winning command buffer according to the reception order. The free area of the command buffer at the time of winning the first start, that is, the data in the area where the data is not stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum hold display number in which the storage area of the start winning command is "0000 (H)" in the first start winning command buffer. Each effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the first start winning opening designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

Further, the command buffer at the time of the first start winning is provided with a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the hold display numbers, and a storage area for storing the display mode change pattern described later. .. The display mode change pattern is a type showing a change (transition) pattern of the display mode of the hold display. The display mode change patterns corresponding to the hold display numbers "0" to "4" in the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) include "PT4-4-22", "PT3-2-04", and "0", respectively. , "0", "0" are stored. As will be described later, "PT4-4-22" and "PT3-2-04" are display mode change patterns determined when the number of reserved memories (number of reserved items) is "4" and "3", respectively. There are a pattern in which the display mode changes twice and a pattern in which the display mode changes once. When the display mode change pattern is "0", the display mode change pattern is not set and the hold notice effect is not executed. Therefore, the display mode (display color) of the hold display and the active display is the normal mode. It remains "white" and does not change (in the example shown, the hold is not remembered in the first place). Although not shown, the command buffer at the time of winning the first start shown in FIG. 10-7 (A) contains information (stage) indicating which stage of the display mode change pattern is the hold display. An area (stage number storage area) for storing the number) is also provided (the same applies to the second start winning command buffer shown in FIG. 10-7 (B)).

Further, FIG. 10-7 (B) is a configuration example of the command buffer at the time of winning the second start. In the second start winning command buffer, various command data constituting the start winning received command received at the time of the second starting winning is stored. The command buffer at the time of winning the second start corresponds to each of the storage areas (hold display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data corresponding to the maximum value (for example, 4) of the second special figure hold storage number. Area to be used) is provided. Similar to the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, the command buffer at the time of the second start winning in the feature unit 074AK in this embodiment has a hold display number “0” as shown in the variable display during execution. An area is provided for storing various corresponding command data.

When there is a start prize to the 2nd start winning opening, 4 commands: 2nd starting winning opening designation command, 2nd special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, and variation pattern judgment result designation command are 1 The set effect control command (command at the time of starting winning) is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, in addition to these second start winning opening designation command, second special figure hold memory designation command, symbol judgment result designation command, variation pattern judgment result designation command, and other information are held. A storage area is secured so that it can be stored in association with the stored information.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the data for specifying the start winning command from the beginning of the free area of the second start winning command buffer according to the reception order. The free area of the command buffer at the time of winning the second start, that is, the data in the area where the data is not stored is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when the start winning command is received, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the minimum hold display number in which the storage area of the start winning command is "0000 (H)" in the second start winning command buffer. Each effect control command data is stored in the storage area in the order of the second start winning opening designation command, the first special figure hold storage designation command, the symbol judgment result designation command, and the variation pattern judgment result designation command.

Further, in the second start winning command buffer, similarly to the first starting winning command buffer, a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the hold display numbers is provided, and a display stage change pattern described later is provided. A storage area for storing is provided. In the example shown in FIG. 10-7 (B), an example is shown in which the effect control command data is not stored in any of the storage areas of the hold display numbers “0” to “4”.

Returning to the description of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-6, after executing step S402, or when it is determined that the command at the time of starting winning is not received (step S401; No), the effect control CPU 120 , It is determined whether or not the game state designation command has been received (step S403). When it is determined that the game state designation command has been received (step S403; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 switches the on / off state of the high accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the content of the received game state designation command. (Step S404).

The high-probability flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) and is turned on in response to the probable change state, and is a probabilistic flag on the main board 11 side. The on state / off state is switched according to the switching of the on state / off state. The high base flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) and is turned on in response to the time saving state, and is a time saving flag on the main board 11 side. The on state / off state is switched according to the switching of the on state / off state. For example, when the game state specification command specifies the high accuracy high base state (for example, when the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are specified to be on), the effect control CPU 120 has a high accuracy flag and a high accuracy flag. Turn both base flags on (if they are already on, keep them on. The same applies to the on / off states for both flags). When the game state specification command specifies the high probability low base state (for example, when the probability variation flag is on and the time saving flag is off), the high probability flag is turned on and the high base is set. Turn off the flag. When the game state specification command specifies the low probability low base state (normal state) (for example, when the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are specified to be off), both the high probability flag and the high base flag are used. Turn it off.

After executing step S404, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405), and the command analysis processing To finish.

Here, with reference to FIG. 10-8, a process executed in response to the reception of each effect control command in the command analysis process will be described. The content shown in the item of "process content" shown in FIG. 10-8 is, for example, the process executed in step S405. Further, the step number shown in the item of "process content" indicates the step number in the flowchart shown in FIG. 10-6, and means that the corresponding step process is executed. Further, each reception flag and each storage area shown in the item of "processing content" are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Also, setting the receive flag means turning it on.

For example, when the received effect control command is a variation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variation pattern command reception flag.

Further, for example, when the received effect control command is a display result specification command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122.

FIG. 10-9 is a flowchart showing an example of the lookahead advance notice setting process in step S161 shown in FIG. 7. When the look-ahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-9 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a start winning command has been received (step 074AKS001). When it is determined that the start winning command has been received (step 074AKS001; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the received starting winning command is the first hold storage number addition designation command received in the low base state, or the high. It is determined whether or not the command is one of the second hold storage number addition designation commands received in the base state (step 074AKS002). In the present embodiment, by executing the process of step 074AKS002, the hold notice effect (change effect) can be executed when the hold memory increases based on the winning of the first start winning opening in the low base state. , In the high base state, the hold notice effect (change effect) can be executed when the hold memory increases based on the winning of the second start winning opening.

When it is determined that either the first start winning opening designation command received in the low base state or the second starting winning opening designation command received in the high base state (step 074AKS002; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 Determines the display mode of the active display as the final display mode of the pending display to be displayed (step 074AKS003). The effect control CPU 120 is first reserved with reference to the active display mode determination table shown in FIG. 10-10, which is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121, for example, according to the variable display result and the variation pattern of the variable display. The display mode of the active display as the final change destination of the display or the hold display displayed as the second hold display (how many steps to change when the change effect is executed) is determined. The effect control CPU 120 may acquire the variable display result and the variation pattern of the variable display by referring to the symbol determination result designation command and the variation pattern determination result specification command included in the start winning command.

Next, the determination of the display mode of the active display will be described. In the present embodiment, a change effect is executed in which the display mode (including at least color) of the hold display corresponding to the variable display that has not been started and the active display corresponding to the variable display being executed is changed stepwise. .. The active display mode determination table shown in FIG. 10-10 is a table for predetermining the display mode (also referred to as “final display mode”) of the active display, which is the final stage of the change (transition) of the display mode. As shown in FIG. 10-10, the active display mode determination table is used to determine which of stages 1 to 4 the final display mode should be for each variable display result (including jackpot type and variation pattern). The decision rate of is assigned. More specifically, the variable display results are classified into "big hit (probability / non-probability)", "big hit (probability)", "loss (super reach) / small hit", and "other than the above". Different decision ratios are assigned to "white", "blue", "green", and "red" prepared as display colors of the active display. In this embodiment, active display is performed in colors such as white in stage 1, blue in stage 2, green in stage 3, and red in stage 4.

As shown in FIG. 10-10, when the variable display result is a "big hit (probability / non-probability change)" in which a 16-round game is executed, the active display mode (display color), which is the final display mode, is set. The decision rate of "green" which is "stage 3" is the highest, and the decision rate is lower in the order of "blue" of "stage 2", "white" of "stage 1", and "red" of "stage 4". Is set to. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability)" in which the two-round game is executed, the determination ratio of "green", which is "stage 3", is the highest as the active display mode (display color). Next, the determination ratio of "blue" in "stage 2" is high, and the determination ratio of "red" in "stage 4" and "white" in "stage 1" is set to be the lowest. Further, when the variable display result is "loss (super reach)" or "small hit" including the super reach effect in the fluctuation pattern, the active display mode (display color) is "stage 2", "blue". The decision rate is the highest, and the decision rate is set so that "white" in "stage 1" and "green" in "stage 3" have the same ratio, followed by "red" in "stage 4". There is. If the variable display result does not correspond to any of the above-mentioned "big hit (probability / non-probability)", "big hit (probability)", "loss (super reach)", and "small hit", the active display mode (active display mode) The display color) is set to the determination ratio only for "white". Further, when the variable display result is "missing", the active display mode (display color) is set so as not to be determined to be "red".

With such a setting, if the active display (including the case where it changes at the hold display stage) changes up to the "red" stage of "stage 4", the variable display result will always be a "big hit". It can be notified. In addition, when the active display changes to the "green" stage of "stage 3", it can be suggested that the variable display result is likely to be "big hit" (probability change / non-probability change / sudden change). .. In addition, if it remains "white" in "stage 1", there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be "missing" or "small hit", and when the hold notice effect is executed (that is,). It can be suggested that when the display mode of the hold display is changed), it is more likely to be controlled in a state advantageous to the player than when it is not executed.

In the change effect (hold notice effect), the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" in which the variable display result is always "big hit" is also called the big hit confirmation stage. The display mode of "red" in "stage 4" is the jackpot confirmation stage, and as shown in FIG. 10-10, 10% when the variable display result is "big hit (probability change / non-probability change)". Only selected, so the rarity value is high. In the illustrated example, the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" is shown as the big hit confirmation stage, but it is also determined when the variable display result is "miss" or "small hit", for example. (That is, the jackpot does not have to be confirmed). In this case, if the display mode of "red" in "stage 4" is determined, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" increases (the higher the number of stages, the higher the possibility of becoming a "big hit". To) The decision ratio may be set.

Returning to FIG. 10-9, after determining the display mode of the active display by the process of step 074AKS003, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the active display determined in step 074AKS003, the first special figure reservation number designation command, and the first 2 The display mode change pattern is determined according to the number of reserved memories indicated by any of the special figure reserved memory number designation commands, and the first reserved display or the second reserved display is displayed (step 074AKS004). As for the number of reserved storages, the first special figure holding storage number designation command is received when the first start winning opening designation command is received, and the second special figure is obtained when the second starting winning opening designation command is received. It may be specified by referring to the hold storage number specification command. In the process of step 074AKS004, the display mode change pattern in the first hold display or the second hold display is determined with reference to the display mode change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-15. The display mode change pattern indicates a change pattern such as which stage (which display color) is to be transitioned after the number of shifts of the hold display before the active display, which is the final stage, is displayed. The display mode change pattern determined in step 074AKS004 is stored in the display mode change pattern in the first start winning command buffer shown in FIG. 10-7 or in the second start winning command buffer shown in FIG. 10-7. Stored in the area.

As described above, the display mode change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-15 determines a display mode change pattern indicating a change in the display mode of the hold display and the active display, which is the target of the notice of the hold notice effect. It is a table referenced to do. The display mode change pattern determination table is classified according to the number of holds (hold display number of the hold storage which is the notice target of the hold notice effect) and the active display mode (final display mode). Specifically, the number of holds of "4" to "2" is different, and the active display of "white", "blue", "green", and "red" such as "stage 1" to "stage 4" is displayed. The display mode change pattern determination table is divided according to the display color. In addition, in each display mode change pattern determination table classified by the number of holds and the active display mode, "big hit (16R)" ("big hit (probability change / non-probability change)"), "big hit (probability change)", "loss (super)" Different determination ratios are assigned to the display mode change patterns set according to the active display mode (final display mode) for each variable display result such as "reach)" and "small hit".

The hold display is displayed in any of "white", "blue", "green", and "red" such as "stage 1" to "stage 4" at the start of the hold display accompanying the start winning. In addition, the hold display is shifted and displayed as the hold memory is exhausted, and at the timing when the change effect (hold notice effect) is executed, while a new variable display is being executed (including the variable display corresponding to the active display). , Can be changed to different display colors (stages), "stage 1" "white" → "stage 2" "blue" → "stage 3" "green" → "stage 4" "stage 4" It changes step by step in the order of "red". In addition, the active display may be displayed at a different stage from the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "1". In addition, when changing the stage, only the change to the upper stage is allowed (it does not change from the upper stage to the lower stage), for example, "white" in "stage 1" → "green" in "stage 3". It may be omitted in the middle and changed to a higher stage.

10-11 (A) to 10-12 (D) show when the number of reserved memories (number of pending) is "4" (when the reserved memory to be notified of the pending notice effect is the reserved display number "4"). It is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to in the above, and a display mode change pattern indicating a change in the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" is set. Has been done.

FIG. 10-11 (A) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is “white” in “step 1”. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), when the final display mode is "white" in "stage 1", it corresponds to the hold display and "0" corresponding to the hold display numbers "4" to "1". Only the display mode change pattern PT4-1-01 (display mode change count "0") that does not change while the display color of the active display remains "white" in "stage 1" is set, and the determination ratio assigned to each variable display result. Is 100% uniformly.

FIG. 10-11 (B) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is “blue” in “stage 2”. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), as the display mode change pattern, the display colors of the hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" are "stage 2". PT4-2-01 (display mode change count "0") that does not change as "blue" and "stage 1" in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "4", and the hold display number "3" PT4-2-02-05 (Display mode change) in which the display color changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "blue" in "stage 2" in either the hold display or the active display corresponding to "0". The number of times "1") is set.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), when the variable display result is "loss (super reach)" or "small hit", the display mode change pattern PT4-2-02 in which the number of changes in the display mode is "1". Of ~ 05, the determination ratio assigned to the display mode change pattern PT4-2-05 is the highest as compared with the case of other variable display results, and the determination ratio assigned to PT4-2-02 is the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (16R)", it is assigned to PT4-2-02 among the display mode change patterns PT4-2-02 to 05 in which the number of changes in the display mode is "1". The decision rate is the highest, and the decision rate assigned to PT4-2-05 is the lowest.

With such a setting, when the change effect is performed, the later the timing at which the display mode changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "blue" in "stage 2", the more the variable display becomes "big hit (16R)". It can be suggested that there is a high possibility of becoming. Apart from this, when the display mode change pattern PT4-2-01 that does not change while the hold display remains "stage 2" is executed, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit (16R)". The determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table may be set as described above. According to this, since the hold display of "stage 2" is performed from the beginning of winning, the player can be given a sense of security. In addition, the display mode change pattern determination table is determined so that the earlier the timing at which the display mode of the hold display changes from "stage 1" to "stage 2" is, the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit (16R)". You may set the ratio. According to this, the player's attention to the hold display can be attracted.

FIG. 10-11 (C) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is “green” in “stage 3”. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (C), as the display mode change pattern, the display colors of the hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" are "stage 3". PT4-3-01 (display mode change count "0") that does not change as "green" and "stage 1" in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "4", and the hold display number "3" PT4-3-02-05 that changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "green" in "stage 3" in either the hold display or the active display corresponding to "0" (display mode change count "1" ”) And, in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number“ 4 ”, it is“ blue ”of“ stage 2 ”, and in either the hold display or the active display corresponding to the hold display numbers“ 3 ”to“ 0 ”. In PT4-3-06 to 09 (display mode change count "1") that changes from "blue" in "stage 2" to "green" in "stage 3", and in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "4". It is "white" of "stage 1", and "white" of "stage 1" to "blue" of "stage 2" in either the hold display or the active display corresponding to the hold display numbers "3" to "0". , And PT4-3-10-14 (display mode change count "2") that changes from "blue" in "stage 2" to "green" in "stage 3" is set.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (C), in the feature unit 074AK in this embodiment, the determination ratio is such that the higher the number of changes in the display mode, the higher the expectation that the variable display becomes a “big hit (16R)”. Is assigned. Further, the determination ratio is assigned so that the later the timing of changing to the "green" display mode of "stage 3", the higher the expectation that the variable display will be "big hit (16R)".

With such a setting, when the change effect is performed, the later the timing at which the display mode changes to "green" in "stage 3" and the larger the number of changes, the more the variable display becomes "big hit (16R)". It can be suggested that it is likely. Apart from this, when the display mode change pattern PT4-3-01 that does not change while the hold display remains "stage 3" is executed, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit (16R)". The determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table may be set as described above. According to this, since the hold display of "stage 3" is performed from the beginning of winning, the player can be given a sense of security. In addition, the determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table is set so that the earlier the timing at which the display mode of the hold display changes to "stage 3" is, the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit (16R)". May be good. According to this, the player's attention to the hold display can be attracted. In addition, the display mode change pattern is determined so that the variable display result is more likely to be "big hit (16R)" as the pattern changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "green" in "stage 3" at once in multiple stages. You may set the determination ratio of the table. According to this, it is possible to exert the effect of being upgraded in a plurality of stages (impact on the player), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 10-12 (D) is a display mode change pattern determination table referred to when the active display mode (final display mode) is “red” in “step 4”. As shown in FIG. 10-12 (D), as the display mode change pattern, the display colors of the hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers "4" to "1" and the active display corresponding to "0" are "stage 4". PT4-4-01 (display mode change count "0") that does not change as "red" in the above, and "white" in "stage 1" in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "4", and the hold display PT4-4-02-05 (display mode) that changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "red" in "stage 4" in either the hold display or the active display corresponding to the numbers "3" to "0". The number of changes "1") and the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "4" are "blue" in "stage 2", and the hold display or active display corresponding to the hold display numbers "3" to "0". Corresponds to PT4-4-06 to 09 (display mode change count "1") that changes from "blue" in "stage 2" to "red" in "stage 4" and the hold display number "4" in any of the above. "Green" of "Stage 3" in the hold display to be performed, and "Green" to "Stage 4" of "Stage 3" in either the hold display or the active display corresponding to the hold display numbers "3" to "0". PT4-4-10-13 (display stage change count "1") that changes to "red" in "" and "white" in "stage 1" in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "4". In either the hold display or the active display corresponding to the hold display numbers "3" to "0", from "white" in "stage 1" to "blue" in "stage 2", and further from "blue" in "stage 2". PT4-4-14-19 (display stage change count "2") that changes to "red" in "stage 4" and "white" in "stage 1" in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "4" Therefore, in either the hold display or the active display corresponding to the hold display numbers "3" to "0", "white" of "stage 1" to "green" of "stage 3", and further "stage 3" of "" PT4-4-20 to 25 (display mode change count "2") that changes from "green" to "red" in "stage 4" and "stage 1" "stage 1" in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "4" It is "white", and in either the hold display or the active display corresponding to the hold display numbers "3" to "0", "white" of "stage 1" to "blue" of "stage 2", and further "stage 2". PT4-4-26-29 (display stage change count "3") that changes from "blue" in "stage 3" to "green" in "stage 3" and from "green" in "stage 3" to "red" in "stage 4" ") Is set.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (D), in the feature unit 074AK in this embodiment, the determination ratio is such that the higher the number of changes in the display mode, the higher the expectation that the variable display becomes a “big hit (16R)”. Is assigned. Further, the determination ratio is assigned so that the later the timing of changing to the "red" display mode of "stage 4" is, the higher the expectation that the variable display will be "big hit (16R)". Further, when the variable display result is "loss (super reach)" or "small hit", the final display mode is not "stage 4", so that the display stage change patterns PT4-4-01 to 17 have a determination ratio. Not assigned.

With such a setting, when the change effect is performed, the later the timing at which the display mode changes to "red" in "stage 4" and the larger the number of changes, the more the variable display becomes "big hit (16R)". It can be suggested that it is likely. Apart from this, when the display mode change pattern PT4-4-01 that does not change while the hold display remains "stage 4" is executed, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit (16R)". The determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table may be set as described above. According to this, since the hold display of "stage 4" is performed from the beginning of winning, the player can be given a sense of security. In addition, the determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table is set so that the earlier the timing at which the display mode of the hold display changes to "stage 4" is, the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit (16R)". May be good. According to this, the player's attention to the hold display can be attracted. In addition, the display mode change pattern is determined so that the variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit (16R)" as the pattern changes from "white" in "stage 1" to "red" in "stage 4" at once in multiple stages. You may set the determination ratio of the table. According to this, it is possible to exert the effect of being upgraded in a plurality of stages (impact on the player), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

10-13 (A) to 10-14 (D) are display stages referred to when the number of holds is "3" (when the hold memory of the notice target of the hold notice effect is the hold display number "3"). In the change pattern determination table, a display stage change pattern indicating a change in the display stage of the hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers “3” to “1” and the active display corresponding to “0” is set. Further, FIGS. 10-15 (A) to 10-15 (D) show a display stage change pattern referred to when the number of holds is "2" (when the hold memory of the notice target of the hold notice effect is the hold display number "2"). It is a determination table, and a display stage change pattern indicating a display stage of a hold display corresponding to the hold display numbers "2" to "1" and an active display corresponding to "0" is set. Also for these, as in the display mode change pattern determination table in FIGS. 10-11 (A) to 10-12 (D), the later the timing at which the display mode changes to the final display mode and the greater the number of changes, the more. The decision ratio is assigned so that the variable display is more likely to be a "big hit (16R)".

Returning to the description of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-9, after executing the process of step 074AKS004, the effect control CPU 120 sets the expectation level to be controlled to at least an advantageous state such as a variable display compatible display as a color type. By setting the image including the image notified by the above in a monochrome mode, a monochrome effect that makes it impossible for the player to see which kind of color is displayed (which expected display color). The monochrome effect setting process for execution is executed (step 074AKS005). In the feature unit 074AK of this embodiment, the processing of step 074AKS003 and step 074AKS004 is executed, and then the monochrome effect setting process is performed in step 074AKS005. However, the monochrome effect setting process is performed first to perform the monochrome effect. The display mode of the active display and the display mode change pattern may be determined depending on whether or not the above is executed.

FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the monochrome effect setting process executed in step 074AKS005 of FIG. 10-9. When the monochrome effect setting process shown in FIGS. 10-16 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the monochrome effect flag indicating that the monochrome effect is being executed is set to the ON state (step). 074AKS051). If the monochrome effect flag is on (step 074AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the monochrome effect setting process as it is. The monochrome effect flag may be provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example.

When the monochrome effect flag is off (step 074AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 holds the display mode of the hold (including the active display) before the current hold, which is the target of the pre-reading notice. Is present or not, that is, whether or not the display mode (front display mode) of the hold or active display existing in the foreground changes (step 074AKS051A). In step 074AKS051A, the contents of the command buffer at the time of starting winning may be confirmed and determined. Specifically, the display mode change pattern corresponding to the hold display number before the hold display number targeted this time is confirmed. Then, it may be determined whether or not the display mode in the foreground changes.

When the display mode in the foreground changes (step 074AKS051A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the monochrome effect setting process. In the feature unit 074AK, once the monochrome effect is executed, at least the monochrome effect is continued until the variable display corresponding to the target hold display is started. Therefore, the hold display existing before the target hold display And it becomes impossible to visually recognize the change in the active display. Therefore, when the front display mode changes, the monochrome effect is not executed, and the change in the front display mode can be visually recognized.

When the display mode in front does not change (step 074AKS051A; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of times the display mode is changed is one or more, that is, whether or not to execute the change effect (step 074AKS052). ). Whether or not the number of display mode changes is one or more may be determined by checking the display mode change pattern determined in step 074AKS004 of FIG. 10-9. When the number of changes in the display mode is 0 (step 074AKS052; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the monochrome effect setting process.

When the number of times the display mode is changed is one or more (step 074AKS052; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the monochrome effect is executed according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-17 according to the variable display result (step 074AKS052; Yes). Step 074AKS053). As shown in FIG. 10-17, in the feature unit 074AK in this embodiment, the determination ratio is such that when the monochrome effect is executed, the expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit is higher than when the monochrome effect is not executed. Is assigned. In addition, when the monochrome effect is executed, the determination ratio is assigned so as to be equal to or higher than the super reach (super reach loss, small hit, big hit). Not limited to this, even in the case of normal reach loss or non-reach loss, the monochrome effect may be executed at a lower rate than other variable display results. In the illustrated example, an example in which the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the monochrome effect is assigned according to the variable display result is shown. For example, depending on which display color is the display mode of the active display. The decision ratios may be different. For example, the determination ratio may be highest when the display mode of the active display is "red", and the determination ratio may be decreased in the order of "green"> "blue"> "white". According to this, it is possible to notify that the display mode of the active display finally changes to a display color having a high degree of expectation, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the change in the active display.

After returning to FIG. 10-16 and executing the process of step 074AKS053, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the monochrome effect, that is, whether or not the monochrome effect is executed (step 074AKS054). When the monochrome effect is not executed, that is, when the monochrome effect is not executed (step 074AKS054; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the monochrome effect setting process.

When the monochrome effect is executed (step 074AKS054; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the end timing of the monochrome effect from "timing 1" to "timing" according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-18 according to the variable display result. It is determined at any of the timings of "3" (step 074AKS055). "Timing 1" of the feature portion 074AK in this embodiment is the timing of the normal reach, that is, the timing immediately after the reach state is reached, and "timing 2" is the timing at the start of the reach production of the super reach, and "timing 3". Is the timing of the middle stage of the reach production of Super Reach. That is, the timing of "timing 1" is the earliest timing after the start of the variable display, then "timing 2" is the earliest, and "timing 3" is the latest timing. As shown in FIG. 10-18, in the feature unit 074AK in this embodiment, the expectation degree is “timing 3”> “timing 2”> “timing 1”, and the variable display is started and then ended. The determination ratio is set so that the longer the period (the later the end timing) (in other words, the longer the execution period of the monochrome effect), the higher the expectation that the variable display result will be a "big hit". Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the execution period of the monochrome effect. As shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "other than the above" which is neither "big hit (probability change / non-probability change)", "big hit (probability change)", or "loss (super reach) / small hit". , Since the monochrome effect is not executed, the decision ratio is not assigned.

After returning to FIG. 10-16 and executing the process of step 074AKS055, the effect control CPU 120 performs monochrome effect execution control for executing the monochrome effect (step 074AKS056). By performing the process of step 074AKS056, the execution of the monochrome effect (monochrome output process) is started. As a result, the target image in monochrome mode such as hold display, active display, background image, etc. is displayed in monochrome mode. In the feature unit 074AK in this embodiment, the hold display and the active display are displayed in "white" in the first stage (displayed in a display color displayed at a high rate before the change effect is executed). In step 074AKS056, the output sounds such as the sound effects and the effect sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting the sound effects and the like in accordance with the execution of the monochrome effect are muted, and the game effect lamp for the game effect is muted. Control is performed to turn off 9. After executing the process of step 074AKS056, the effect control CPU 120 sets the monochrome effect flag to the ON state (step 074AKS057), and then ends the monochrome effect setting process. In step 074AKS056, for example, when the image to be monochrome is displayed in two colors of black and white by the monochrome effect, the lighting color of the game effect lamp 9 is also changed to two colors of black and white. The number of colors may correspond to the number of colors.

Returning to the description of the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-9, in the process of step 074AKS002, the first start winning slot designation command received in the low base state and the second starting winning slot designation received in the high base state. When it is determined that neither of the commands is used (step 074AKS002; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display or the second hold display in the display mode of the first stage (white) (step 074AKS005A). ).

After executing any of the processes of step 074AKS005 and step 074AKS005A, or when it is determined in the process of step 074AKS001 that the start winning command has not been received (step 074AKS001; No), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variable start. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (step 074AKS006). Whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the fluctuation start designation command by referring to whether or not either the first fluctuation start designation command reception flag or the second fluctuation start designation command reception flag is set, for example. It may be judged whether or not. When it is determined that the fluctuation start designation command has not been received (step 074AKS006; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the hold display setting process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start designation command has been received (step 074AKS006; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received fluctuation designation command is the second fluctuation start designation command (step 074AKS007). .. When it is determined that the received fluctuation start designation command is not the second fluctuation start designation command, that is, the received fluctuation start designation command is the first fluctuation start designation command (step 074AKS007; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines. Each first hold display was associated with each of the display stage variation patterns stored in the storage area of the display stage variation pattern in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning as shown in FIG. 10-7 (A). It is changed or maintained according to the display stage fluctuation pattern, and the hold display of the hold display number "1" is moved (shifted) to the active display area in the first hold display unit 5HL of the image display device 5, and "2". The display position of each first hold display corresponding to "4" is moved (shifted) to the right by one (step 074AKS008).

After executing the process of step 074AKS008, the effect control CPU 120 erases the stored contents of the hold display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, and corresponds to the hold display numbers "1" to "4". After shifting the stored contents one by one (step 074AKS009), the look-ahead notice setting process ends. Regarding the stored contents of the hold display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, after the final stop symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display effect processing in step S172, that is, the variable display result is derived and displayed. You may erase it afterwards.

In the process of step 074AKS007, when it is determined that the received variation designation command is the second variation start designation command (step 074AKS007; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 wins the second start as shown in FIG. 10-7 (B). With reference to the display stage variation pattern stored in the storage area of the display stage variation pattern in the hour command buffer, each second hold display is changed or maintained according to the display stage variation pattern associated with the display device. In the second hold display unit 5HR of 5, the hold display of the hold display number “1” is moved (shifted) to the active display area, and each second hold display corresponding to “2” to “4” is displayed. The display position of is moved (shifted) to the left one by one (step 074AKS010).

After executing the process of step 074AKS010, the effect control CPU 120 erases the stored contents of the hold display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, and corresponds to the hold display numbers "1" to "4". After shifting the stored contents one by one (step 074AKS011), the look-ahead notice setting process ends. Regarding the stored contents of the hold display number "0" in the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, after the final stop symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display effect processing in step S172, that is, the variable display result is derived and displayed. You may erase it afterwards.

FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. 7. When the variable display start setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first features, for example, based on a display result specification command (command stored in the display result specification command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the figure display result is "missing" (step S551). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "missing" (step S551; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in, for example, the variation pattern specification command (variation pattern specification command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11. The variation pattern specified by the command) is a non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1, PA1-2, PC1-1) corresponding to the case of "non-reach" in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode. Whether or not it is determined (step S552).

When it is determined in the process of step S552 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination (step S553). ). The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative symbol of a non-reach combination updated by, for example, an effect random counter provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122, and outputs the ROM 121. The final decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the non-reach combination) is determined by referring to the decorative symbol determination table of the non-reach combination prepared in advance.

When it is determined in the process of step S552 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S552; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination (step S554). ). The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a decorative symbol of the reach combination updated by, for example, a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect, and stores the reach combination in advance in the ROM 121. The final decorative design (decorative design of the reach combination) is determined by referring to the decoration design determination table of.

When it is determined in the process of step S551 that the special figure display result is not "missing" (step S551; No), whether the special figure display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability" in the effect control CPU 120. , Or, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step S555). When it is determined that the special figure display result is "probability" or "small hit" (step S555; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is in the case of "probability" or "small hit", for example, at the opening chance eye. A combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol corresponding to the case is determined (step S556). The effect control CPU 120 finally configures one of a plurality of types of open chances in response to the designation of either the fluctuation pattern PC1-1 or the PC1-2 by the fluctuation pattern designation command. Determine the combination of fixed decorative symbols that will be the stop symbols. In this case, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the chance eye, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit, is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is used. By referring to or the like, it is sufficient to determine the combination of the definite decorative symbols that constitute one of the opening chance eyes. In the chance eye determination table, for example, "3", "5", "7" composed of odd numbers as chance eyes for sudden big hits, and "2", "2", "7" composed of even numbers as chance eyes for small hits. It suffices if "4", "6" and the like are set.

When it is determined in the process of step S555 that the special figure display result is neither "probability" nor "small hit" (step S555; No), the effect control CPU 120 is a final stop symbol that constitutes the big hit combination. The combination of symbols is determined (step S557). The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol, which is updated by, for example, a random number circuit 124 or a random number counter for effect. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to the jackpot type specified by the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the image display device 5 A decorative symbol having the same stop-displayed symbol number is determined in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the display area.

After executing any of the processes of steps S553, S554, S556, and S557, the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of types of change effects having different periods from the start of the variable display to the change of the display mode of the hold display. Among them, the change effect setting process for setting which type of change effect is to be executed is executed (step 074AKS021).

FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the change effect setting process executed in step 074AKS021 of FIG. 10-19. When the change effect setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the display mode of either the hold display or the active display changes in the variable display executed this time (step 074AKS022). In step 074AKS022, by referring to the display stage change pattern determined in step 074AKS004 of FIG. 10-9, in the variable display executed this time, at least one of the displayed hold displays is displayed as a hold display. It may be determined whether or not the display mode of the active display changes.

When the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for executing the change effect of the success mode (step 074AKS023). , End the change effect setting process. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold display or the active display does not change in the variable display to be executed this time (step 074AKS022; No), after making the setting for executing the change effect of the failure mode or the setting not to execute the change effect. (Step 074AKS024), the change effect setting process is completed. In step 074AKS024, whether or not to execute the change effect of the failure mode may be determined according to, for example, the variable display result or the variation pattern.

The effect of changing the success mode of the feature unit 074AK in this embodiment is an effect of changing the display mode when the shooting star image 074AK001 collides with the hold display or the active display of the change target. The change effect of the failure mode is an effect in which the shooting star image 074AK002 collides with the hold display or the active display of the change target, but does not change the display mode. Each of the change effects is an image of a shooting star, and it is impossible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the target changes until after the collision. In addition, at the time of monochrome production, since the hold display and active display of the change target are also displayed in monochrome, it becomes impossible to visually determine whether the executed change effect is a success mode or a failure mode. There is.

In the processing of step 074AKS023 and step 074AKS024, when the change effect is executed, the execution period (change effect period) of the change effect is also set. The change effect period may be any period as long as the variable display during execution is not performed during the reach effect of the super reach. This is to prevent the player's attention from being dispersed by the degree of expectation being dispersed between the reach effect being executed and the change effect.

Further, when there are a plurality of change targets, it is sufficient to determine one of a success mode, a failure mode, and no change effect for each hold (including active display). Further, when determining the display mode change pattern, the pattern of the change effect may be determined from among a plurality of patterns for one display mode change pattern.

Returning to the description of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-19, after executing the process of step 074AKS021, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect control pattern to one of a plurality of prepared patterns (step S560). ). The effect control CPU 120 selects and uses one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special figure variation effect control pattern) in response to, for example, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern determination result specification command. Set as a pattern. Further, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (hold display change patterns) in response to the execution setting of the hold display change effect by the hold display setting process in step S161, and uses the pattern. Set as. If it is determined in step S559 that the specific effect is to be executed, one of the effect control patterns (specific effect control pattern) corresponding to the execution of the specific effect is selected and set as the pattern to be used.

Following the process of step S560, the effect control CPU 120 is provided in a predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern determination result designation command, for example. The initial value of the control process timer is set (step S561). Then, a setting is made on the display screen of the image display device 5 to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern or the like (step S562). At this time, the effect control CPU 120, for example, issues a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in the process of step S559 to the VDP of the display control unit 123. In each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are started to fluctuate. Just do it.

After executing the process of step S562, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S563), and then performs the variable display start setting process. To finish.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect processing executed in step S172 shown in FIG. When the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 30 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer. (Step S801). For example, when the effect control CPU 120 updates the timer value of the effect control process timer (for example, 1 is subtracted) and the end code is read from the effect control pattern in response to the updated effect control process timer value. In addition, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

When it is determined in the process of step S801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect (step S801). S802). The reach effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined according to the fluctuation pattern. When it is determined that the reach effect period is reached (step S802; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the reach effect (step S803).

After executing the process of step S803, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the monochrome effect (step 074AKS031). Since the end timing of the monochrome effect is determined by any of timings 1 to 3 in step 074AKS055 of FIG. 10-16, in step 074AKS031, at the determined end timing of timings 1 to timing 3. It may be determined whether or not there is.

When it is the end timing of the monochrome effect (step 074AKS031; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the monochrome effect end control for ending the monochrome effect (step 074AKS032) and clears the monochrome effect flag to the off state (step). 074AKS033). In the process of step 074AKS032, since the monochrome output process is completed, the number of colors used for the target image to be displayed in the monochrome mode returns to the normal number of colors. Therefore, the hold display and the active display whose display mode has changed due to the change effect are displayed in the changed display color, and the success sound is output.

After executing the process of step 074AKS033, when it is determined in step S802 that it is not the reach effect period (step S802; No), or when it is determined in step 074AKS031 that it is not the end timing of the monochrome effect (step 074AKS031; No). The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the change effect period for executing the change effect of the success mode or the failure mode (step 074AKS034). The change effect period is set when the change effect is set to be executed in step 074AKS023 or step 074AKS024 of FIG. 10-20. When it is determined that it is the change effect period (step 074AKS034; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls to execute the change effect of the success mode or the failure mode (step 074AKS035). In the process of step 074AKS035, since the monochrome output process is performed during the specific effect state during the execution of the monochrome effect (when the monochrome effect flag is on), even if the change effect of the success mode is executed, The hold display and active display are displayed in "white" regardless of the jackpot expectation level. On the other hand, in the normal effect state in which the monochrome effect is not being executed, the display colors are displayed according to the degree of expectation according to the display mode change pattern. Further, in the process of step 074AKS035, the execution start sound of the change effect of the success mode or the failure mode, that is, the effect start sound for notifying the player that the image of the shooting star is displayed, and the success effect or the failure effect are performed. It outputs a success sound or a failure sound that makes it recognizable by hearing. However, while the monochrome effect is being executed (when the monochrome effect flag is on), only the execution start sound is output, and the success sound or the failure sound is not output. The success sound or the failure sound may be output at the timing when the monochrome effect is completed, and may be output by, for example, the process of step 074AKS032. According to this, the player can easily recognize that the display mode of the hold display or the active display of the change target has changed after the end of the monochrome effect.

After executing the process of step 074AKS035, or when it is not the change effect period (step 074AKS034; No), the effect control CPU 120 may be, for example, based on the settings in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, or the like. , Control is performed to execute the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol (step 808).

When it is determined in the process of step S801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S801; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 transmits, for example, a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. , Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative symbol (step S809). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets a predetermined fixed time as a waiting time for receiving the jackpot start designation command (step S811). Next, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S812).

After executing any of the processes of steps S808 and S812, or when it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received in the process of step S809 (step S809; No), the effect control CPU 120 is performing the variable display effect. End the process.

10-22 and 10-23 show an example of the effect operation when the monochrome effect and the change effect are performed. As shown in FIG. 10-22 (A), a variable display corresponding to the active display AH displayed in the active display area AHA is displayed in a state in which three hold displays H1 to hold display H3 are stored. In this state, output sounds such as sound effects and effect sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R are output, and the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect is also lit.

Then, when a new game ball wins the first start winning opening (hold display H4 is displayed), the monochrome effect setting process is performed in the read-ahead notice setting process of FIG. 10-9, and the monochrome effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (B), the background image, the hold display, and the like are displayed in monochrome mode on the image display device 5, and the sound effects and the effect sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R are output. Control is performed to mute the sound and turn off the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect. FIG. 10-22 (B) shows an example in which the variable display being executed is completed in FIG. 10-22 (A). Further, an example is shown in which the display mode of the hold display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22 of FIG. 10-12. In this example, it is assumed that the end timing of the monochrome effect is determined at the timing C, which is the middle stage of the super reach, in step 074AKS055 of FIG. 10-16.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (C), when each hold display shifts and the variable display corresponding to the hold display H1 is started, the hold display H1 is displayed as the active display AH. Then, since the hold of the hold display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display mode of the hold display H4 changes in this variable display. Therefore, the change effect of the success mode set in the process of step 074AKS023 of FIG. 10-20 is performed. As described above, since the monochrome effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (C), the execution start sound, that is, the image of the shooting star is displayed even if the change effect of the success mode is executed. Although the effect start sound for notifying the player is output, the success sound is not output. Further, since the hold display is displayed in the monochrome mode during the monochrome effect, the player cannot visually recognize which display color has changed (whether it is the success mode or the failure mode).

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (D), the reach effect of the super reach A is performed, and as shown in FIG. 10-22 (E), when the variable display corresponding to the hold display H1 is completed, FIG. As shown in -22 (F), each hold display shifts, and the variable display corresponding to the hold display H2 is started. Here, since the hold of the hold display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display mode of the hold display H4 does not change in this variable display. Therefore, when the failure mode change effect is set in the process of step 074AKS024 of FIG. 10-20, the failure mode change effect is performed as shown in FIG. 10-22 (F). Even if the change effect of the failure mode is executed, the execution start sound, that is, the effect start sound for notifying the player that the image of the shooting star is displayed is output, but the failure sound is not output. Further, since the hold display is displayed in the monochrome mode during the monochrome effect, the player cannot visually recognize which display color has changed (whether it is the success mode or the failure mode).

Subsequently, when a new game ball wins the first start winning opening (hold display H5 is displayed), the monochrome effect setting process is performed in the read-ahead notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-9, but the monochrome effect is displayed. Since it is being executed, the execution setting of the monochrome effect is not performed (see FIG. 10-16), but since the processes of step 074AKS003 and step 074AKS004 of FIG. 10-9 are executed, the display mode of the hold display changes. It will be. FIG. 10-22 (G) shows an example in which the variable display being executed in FIG. 10-22 (F) is completed. Further, an example is shown in which the display mode of the hold display H5 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT3-2-04 of FIG. 10-13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-22 (H), each hold display shifts, and the variable display corresponding to the hold display H3 is started. Here, since the hold of the hold display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display mode of the hold display H4 does not change in this variable display, while the hold of the hold display H5 is PT3. Since the display mode changes according to the display mode change pattern of -2-04, the display mode of the hold display H5 changes in this variable display. Therefore, the change effect of the failure mode is performed for the hold display H4, and the change effect of the success mode is performed for the hold display H5. As described above, since the monochrome effect is being executed, the player cannot recognize whether each change effect is a success mode or a failure mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (I), the reach effect of the super reach A is performed, and as shown in FIG. 10-23 (J), when the variable display corresponding to the hold display H3 is completed, FIG. As shown in -23 (K), each hold display shifts, and the variable display corresponding to the hold display H4 is started. Here, since the hold (active display AH) of the hold display H4 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22, the display mode of the active display AH changes in this variable display. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (L), the effect of changing the success mode is performed. Note that FIG. 10-23 (L) shows an example in which the change effect period is during the reach effect of the super reach in the process of step 074AKS023 of FIG. 10-20. On the other hand, since the hold of the hold display H5 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT3-2-04 of FIG. 10-13, the display mode of the hold display H5 does not change in this variable display. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the hold display H5 is set not to execute the change effect in the process of step 074AKS024 of FIG. 10-20.

In the middle of the super reach, it is determined in step 074AKS031 of FIG. 10-21 that the monochrome effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 10-23 (M), the monochrome effect ends, and in accordance with this, the game effect is used. The game effect lamp 9 is turned on, and a success sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this example, the success sound is output if the display mode changes even once during the monochrome effect. For example, the failure effect is performed twice and the success effect is performed once before the change is performed once. In this case, the failure sound may be output twice and then the success sound may be output once so that the player can recognize by the player's hearing how many times the display mode has changed. .. According to this, it is possible to notify the player of the timing when the display mode is changed, and it is possible to improve the game interest. As shown in FIG. 10-23 (M), when the monochrome effect is completed, the display color of the hold display H5 and the display color of the active display AH become visible. After that, the variable display ends. In the example shown in FIG. 10-23 (M), the display mode of the active display AH changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT4-4-22 in FIG. 10-12, and thus becomes “red”. The variable display result after that is a "big hit". Since the hold display H5 changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT3-2-04 in FIG. 10-13, the display mode is “green” in the example shown in FIG. 10-23 (M). As a change in the display mode, the shape may be changed in addition to the color. Further, for example, the color of the effect image displayed around the active display or the hold display may be changed. Further, in addition to changing the shape of the active display and the hold display, the color of the effect image may also be changed. Such changes may be made during the monochrome effect, or the monochrome effect may be started by making these changes.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 074AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a monochrome effect, and while the monochrome effect is being executed (specific effect state), the number of colors of the image including the hold display and the active display is displayed to be smaller than that in the normal effect state. In the specific effect state, the jackpot expectation is higher than in the normal effect state, and in the normal effect state, the display color of the hold display or the active display is changed to the color according to the expectation by executing the change effect. In the specific effect state, monochrome output processing is performed to display the display modes of the hold display and the active display in a common color regardless of the degree of expectation. Then, when the state shifts from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the monochrome output process ends, and the display modes of the hold display and the active display are displayed in colors according to the degree of expectation. Therefore, the expectation degree notification by color can be suitably performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display mode of the hold display or the active display in the first stage "white" regardless of the degree of expectation during the specific effect state. Therefore, the expectation degree notification by color can be suitably performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the process of step 074AKS056, for example, when the image to be monochrome is displayed in two colors of black and white by the monochrome effect, the effect control CPU 120 also has two colors of black and white for the lighting color of the game effect lamp 9. The number of colors is set to correspond to the number of colors of the image in the monochrome mode. According to this, it is possible to make the state of the specific production stand out, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the monochrome effect (monochrome output process) in the process of step 074AKS056. As a result, the target image in monochrome mode such as hold display, active display, background image, etc. is displayed in monochrome mode. According to this, it is possible to make the state of the specific production stand out, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 mutes the output sound during the specific effect state, outputs only the execution start sound for the change effect, and does not output the success sound or the failure sound for the change effect. According to this, it is possible to make it stand out that it is in the specific effect state, and it is possible to recognize the start of execution of the change effect. Then, the success sound or the failure sound is output at the timing when the monochrome effect is completed. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that the specific display such as the hold display or the active display has changed, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

(Modification example of feature part 074AK)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and has been described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a structure of parts. In addition, at least a part of each of the following modifications may be combined.

In the above embodiment, an example in which the variable display compatible display and the background image are in the monochrome mode in the specific effect state during the monochrome effect execution is shown, but this is an example. For example, in addition to the variable display compatible display, an image that notifies the jackpot expectation by the displayed color, such as notifying the expectation by the color of the displayed character or message, may be in monochrome mode. According to this, as the effect of the specific effect state, it is possible to make the state in which the degree of expectation cannot be recognized more preferably, and it is possible to arouse the expectation of the player. On the other hand, on the contrary, it is not an image displayed by lottery on the side of the effect control board 12 (not an image displayed by lottery according to the degree of expectation), but by a command or the like transmitted from the side of the main board 11. The image (special information) for displaying the information shall be displayed in a normal mode (for example, full color) instead of a monochrome mode. Specifically, it is composed only of numbers, for example, odd numbers are displayed in red, even numbers are displayed in blue (displayed in the same color as the decorative pattern), always small symbols that are always visible to the player, and special figures. By displaying the number of holds in 1 and special figure 2 in numbers, the number of holds is always displayed so that the player can identify it, and the right-handed display is controlled so that it is not in the monochrome mode in the monochrome effect. Just do it. Since the right-handed display is displayed in the probabilistic state, it may be possible to execute the monochrome effect even in the probable change state. Further, in the normal effect state, a small symbol, a constant hold number display, a right-handed display, or the like may be displayed in a monochrome mode, and may be displayed in another color such as red in a specific effect state. According to this, the content suggested by the special information can be recognized even in the specific production state, and it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the specific effect state, an example in which the variable display compatible display (specific display) such as the hold display and the active display is displayed in "white" which is the first stage is shown, but the normal effect state is shown. It may be displayed in a display mode that is not displayed in, and is displayed only in a specific effect state (for example, it is grayed out regardless of the degree of expectation).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the monochrome effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display or the active display always changes, but this is an example. For example, the process of step 074AKS052 of FIG. 10-16 may not be executed, and the monochrome effect may be executed regardless of whether or not the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the execution start timing of the monochrome effect is the start winning time (that is, the timing when the game medium wins the prize), but this is an example. The execution timing of the monochrome effect may be a predetermined timing during the variable display. For example, the monochrome effect is performed at the start of execution of the step-up notice in which the frame color changes in the order of white, blue, green, and red. As the execution timing, the player may not be able to specify to what stage the color of the frame has changed until the end of the monochrome effect. That is, if the monochrome effect can be executed during the execution of the effect that notifies the jackpot expectation degree by the displayed color, the execution timing of the monochrome effect may be arbitrary.

(Explanation of feature 75AK)
Next, the feature portion 075AK of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 075AK of the present embodiment, unlike the feature unit 074AK, the monochrome effect ends when the display mode (display color) of the specific display such as the hold display or the active display changes. That is, the change timing is the end timing of the monochrome effect. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 075AK having such features will be described. The same parts as those described in the above basic explanation and the same parts as those explained in the feature part 074AK will be omitted.

FIG. 10-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the lookahead advance notice setting process executed by the feature unit 075AK. The part that performs the same processing as the lookahead advance notice setting process executed by the feature unit 074AK is assigned the same number as the lookahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-9. In the lookahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-25, in step 074AKS003, after determining the display mode of the active display as the final display mode of the hold display to be displayed, the setting process such as monochrome effect is executed ( Step 075AKS001). The monochrome effect setting process of step 075AKS001 is a process of determining whether or not the monochrome effect is executed, its end timing, and the display mode change pattern of the hold display and the active display.

FIG. 10-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting process such as monochrome effect executed in step 075AKS001 of FIG. 10-24. In the illustrated example, the parts that perform the same processing as the monochrome effect setting processing of FIG. 10-16 are assigned the same numbers as those of FIG. 10-16. When the monochrome effect setting process shown in FIG. 10-25 is started, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the monochrome effect flag is set to the ON state, as in the monochrome effect setting process of FIG. 10-16. In the case of (step 074AKS051), if it is in the off state (step 074AKS051; No), whether or not there is a hold (including active display) whose display mode changes before the current hold that is the target of the pre-reading notice. That is, it is determined whether or not the display mode (display mode in front) of the hold or active display existing in the foreground changes (step 074AKS051A). When the monochrome effect flag is on (step 074AKS051; Yes) or when the display mode in front changes (step 074AKS051A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 ends the monochrome effect setting process.

When the front display mode does not change (step 074AKS051A; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the active display is other than "white" (step 075AKS012). Whether or not the display mode of the active display is other than "white" may be determined by checking the display mode of the active display determined in step 074AKS003 of FIG. 10-24. When the display mode of the active display is "white" (step 075AKS012; No), that is, when the display mode of the active display does not change from the hold display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the PT4-4-01 according to the number of holds. , PT3-1-01, or PT2-2-01, and the display mode change pattern is determined (not shown), and the setting process such as monochrome effect is completed.

When the display mode of the active display is "blue", "green", or "red" other than "white" (step 075AKS012; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the monochrome effect is executed as a variable display result. Accordingly, determination is made according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-17 (step 074AKS053). After executing the process of step 074AKS053, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the monochrome effect, that is, whether or not the monochrome effect is executed (step 074AKS054).

When the monochrome effect is not executed, that is, when the monochrome effect is not executed (step 074AKS054; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines according to the determination ratio of the display mode change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10-11 to 10-15. The display mode change pattern is determined according to the display mode of the active display determined in step 074AKS003 and the number of reserved storages indicated in either the first special figure reserved storage number designation command or the second special figure reserved storage number designation command ( Step 075AKS013), the setting process such as monochrome effect is completed.

When the monochrome effect is executed, that is, when the monochrome effect is executed (step 074AKS054; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 steps according to the display mode change pattern determination table (in monochrome) shown in FIG. 10-26 (A). The display mode change pattern is determined according to the display mode of the active display determined in 074AKS003 and the number of reserved storages indicated in either the first special figure reserved storage number designation command or the second special figure reserved storage number designation command (step). 075AKS014).

The display mode change pattern determination table (at the time of monochrome) shown in FIG. 10-26 (A) is a table referred to for determining the display mode change pattern of the hold display and the active display when the monochrome effect is executed. .. In the feature unit 075AK, when the monochrome effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display does not change, and only the display mode of the active display changes. Specifically, as shown in the figure, the display mode of the hold display is "white", and the number of holds is determined so that the display mode of the active display is determined to be a display mode change pattern of any one of "blue" to "red". Each display mode change pattern is set according to the above.

After returning to FIG. 10-25 and determining the display stage change pattern in step 075AKS014, the effect control CPU 120 changes the active display according to the active display change timing determination table shown in FIG. 10-26 (B). Is determined at any of the timings A to C according to the display mode of the active display (step 075AKS015).

"Timing A" of the feature portion 075AK in this embodiment is the timing before the reach, that is, the timing immediately before the reach state is reached, and "timing B" is the timing at the start of the reach production of the super reach, and "timing C". Is the timing of the middle stage of the reach production of Super Reach. That is, the "timing A" timing is the earliest timing after the start of the variable display, then the "timing B" is the earliest, and the "timing C" is the latest timing. As shown in FIG. 10-26, in the feature unit 075AK in this embodiment, the display mode of the active display changes to a mode with a high degree of expectation in the order of “timing C”> “timing B”> “timing A”. The determination ratio is set so that the later the timing from the start of the variable display to the change, the higher the ratio of the display mode of the active display changing to the display color that is highly expected by the player. Has been done.

After returning to FIG. 10-25 and executing the process of step 075AKS015, the effect control CPU 120 determines the timing immediately after the change timing determined in the process of step 075AKS015 as the end timing of the monochrome effect (step 075AKS016). As a result, the monochrome output process ends at the timing when the display mode of the active display changes, and the active display is displayed in the changed display mode. After executing the process of step 075AKS016, the effect control CPU 120 performs monochrome effect execution control to execute the monochrome effect (step 074AKS056), sets the monochrome effect flag to the ON state (step 074AKS057), and then performs the monochrome effect, etc. End the setting process. When the process of step 074AKS056 is performed, the execution of the monochrome effect (monochrome output process) is started, so that the target image in the monochrome mode such as the hold display, the active display, the background image, etc. is in the monochrome mode. The point to be displayed is the same as that of the feature unit 074AK. In addition, in the specific effect state during the monochrome effect execution, the hold display and active display are displayed in the first stage "white" (displayed in the display color displayed at a high rate before the change effect is executed). , Control to mute the output sound such as the sound effect and the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting the sound effect and the like according to the execution of the monochrome effect, and to turn off the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect. The point that is performed is the same as that of the feature unit 074AK.

After returning to FIG. 10-24 and executing the process of step 074AKS001, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display or the second hold display according to the display mode change pattern determined in step 075AKS013 and step 075AKS014 of FIG. 10-25. Is displayed (step 075AKS002). After executing the process of step 075AKS002, the same process as the lookahead advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-9 is performed (the same process as that of the feature unit 074AK is performed).

FIG. 10-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the change effect setting process performed in the variable display start setting process in the feature unit 075AK (see FIG. 10-19). The change effect setting process performed by the feature unit 075AK differs in that the processes of steps 075AKS021 to 075AKS023 are executed in addition to the change effect setting process performed by the feature unit 074AK, but they are the same in other respects. To do.

When the change effect setting process shown in FIGS. 10-27 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the monochrome effect flag is set to the ON state (step 075AKS021). When the monochrome effect flag is off (step 075AKS021; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the processes of steps 074AKS022 to step 074AKS024 as in the feature unit 074AK.

On the other hand, when the monochrome effect flag is set to the ON state (step 075AKS021; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the display mode of the active display changes in the variable display executed this time (step 074AKS022). ). When the display mode of the active display does not change in the variable display executed this time (step 074AKS022; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the change effect setting process as it is.

When the display mode of the active display changes in the variable display executed this time (step 074AKS022; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the change effect pattern, which is the execution pattern of the change effect, into the change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 10-28. According to this, after setting according to the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. 10-25 (step 075AKS023), the change effect setting process is terminated.

FIG. 10-28 is a diagram showing an example of a change pattern determination table. As shown in the figure, when the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. 10-25 is the timing C, that is, the middle stage of the super reach, the change effect of the failure mode is performed immediately before the reach state which is the timing A, and the timing B At the start of the reach effect of the super reach, the change effect of the failure mode is performed, and in the middle of the super reach, which is the timing, the change effect pattern of the pattern 1 is set. When the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. 10-25 is the timing B, that is, the start of the reach effect of the super reach, the change effect of the failure mode is performed immediately before the reach state which is the timing A, and the change effect of the failure mode is performed at the timing B. At the start of the reach effect of a certain super reach, the change effect pattern of the pattern 2 that executes the change effect of the success mode is set. When the change timing determined in step 075AKS015 of FIG. 10-25 is immediately before the reach state, that is, the change effect pattern of the pattern 3 that executes the change effect of the success mode immediately before the reach state which is the timing A. Is set.

In the illustrated example, an example in which the change effect of the failure mode is executed at the timing when the display mode of the active display does not change is shown, but there may be a pattern in which the change effect is not executed.

FIG. 10-29 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when a monochrome effect and a change effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 10-29 (A), a state in which one of the hold display H1 is stored and a variable display corresponding to the active display AH displayed in the active display area AHA is performed. In addition to outputting sound effects such as sound effects and directing sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect is also lit.

Then, when a new game ball wins the first start winning opening, the hold display H2 is displayed, the display mode of the active display is determined in the pre-reading notice setting process of FIG. 10-24, and the monochrome effect setting process is performed. When the monochrome effect is executed in, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the hold display, and the like in a monochrome mode, and the effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, as shown in FIG. 10-29 (B). Control is performed to mute output sounds such as sounds and production sounds, and to turn off the game effect lamp 9 for game effects. FIG. 10-29 (B) shows an example in which the variable display being executed is completed in FIG. 10-29 (A). Further, in the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display in the hold display H2 is determined to be "red" (step 074AKS003 in FIG. 10-24), and the display mode change pattern of PT2-4-02 is determined (FIG. 10-24). It is assumed that the active display change timing is determined at the timing C in step 075AKS014 of 10-25 (step 075AKS015 of FIG. 10-25). That is, the change effect of the failure mode and the success mode is executed according to the change effect pattern of the pattern 1 (see FIGS. 10-27 and 10-28).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-29 (C), when each hold display shifts and the variable display corresponding to the hold display H1 is started, the hold display H1 is displayed as the active display AH. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-29 (D), when the variable display corresponding to the hold display H1 ends and the variable display corresponding to the hold display H2 starts, as shown in FIG. 10-29 (E). The hold display H2 is displayed as the active display AH. In the example shown in FIG. 10-29 (E), an example of the timing (timing A) immediately before the variable display corresponding to the hold display H2 reaches the reach state is shown. Since the change effect of the failure mode and the success mode is executed according to the change effect pattern of the pattern 1, in the illustrated example, when the change effect of the failure mode is performed at the timing (timing A) immediately before the reach state. Is shown. In the change effect, the execution start sound, that is, the effect start sound for notifying the player that the image of the shooting star is displayed is output, but the success sound and the failure sound are not output. Is similar to.

Then, after the reach state is reached, when the reach effect of the super reach is started (the timing of the timing B is reached), as shown in FIG. 10-29 (F), the change effect of the failure mode is performed again. At the timing C in the middle of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 10-29 (G), a change effect of the success mode is performed, which is the end timing of the monochrome effect, as shown in FIG. 10-29 (H). , The monochrome effect is completed, and in accordance with this, the game effect lamp 9 for the game effect is turned on, and the success sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. As shown in FIG. 10-29 (H), the monochrome effect ends when the display mode of the active display changes, and the display color of the active display AH becomes visible. In the example shown in FIG. 10-29 (H), the display mode of the active display AH changes according to the display mode change pattern of PT2-4-02 of FIG. 10-15, and thus becomes “red”. The variable display result after that is a "big hit".

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 075AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute a monochrome effect, and while the monochrome effect is being executed (specific effect state), the number of colors of the image including the hold display and the active display is displayed to be smaller than that in the normal effect state. In the specific effect state, the jackpot expectation is higher than in the normal effect state, and in the normal effect state, the display color of the hold display or the active display is changed to the color according to the expectation by executing the change effect. In the specific effect state, the state is changed from the specific effect state to the normal effect state at the timing immediately after the display mode of the active display is changed. Therefore, the production pattern becomes various and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a change effect of the success mode that changes the display mode of the active display and a change effect of the failure mode that does not change the display mode of the active display. Then, the monochrome effect is terminated at the timing immediately after the change effect of the success mode is executed and the display mode of the active display is changed. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the display mode of the active display has changed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting process such as a monochrome effect in the lookahead advance notice setting process executed at the timing when the hold display is displayed, that is, the timing when the game medium wins a prize, and starts the monochrome effect. Then, the variable display corresponding to the hold display of the target is started, and after being displayed as the active display, the monochrome effect is ended at the timing immediately after the change effect of the success mode is executed for the active display. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the display color of the active display has changed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the active display at any of the timings A to C. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (B), the later the change timing, the higher the expectation of the active display, and the later the change timing, the higher the jackpot expectation. According to this, the production pattern becomes various and the game entertainment can be improved.

(Modification example of feature part 075AK)
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and has been described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a structure of parts. In addition, at least a part of each of the following modifications may be combined. Further, all or a part of the features shown in the modified example of the feature portion 074AK may be combined.

In the above embodiment, the timing at which the display mode of the active display changes in the specific effect state in which the monochrome effect is being executed is determined by the process of step 075AKS015 in FIG. 10-25 from the timing A to the timing in FIG. An example of determining one of C is shown, but in addition to this, for example, the timing at which the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes even in the normal effect state is the timing A of FIG. ~ Timing C may be determined. In this case, the timing at which the display mode of the active display changes may be determined at the timing C higher in the specific effect state than in the normal effect state. According to this, it is possible to improve the expectation for the specific effect state during the execution of the monochrome effect.

Further, in the above embodiment, the end timing of the monochrome effect is shown immediately after the display mode of the active display is changed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing may be the same as the timing of the change. Further, the display mode is not limited to the active display, and the timing immediately after the display mode of the hold display changes or the changed timing may be set as the end timing of the monochrome effect. That is, the end timing of the specific effect state may include at least the timing when the change effect is executed and the display mode (display color) of the hold display or the active display changes, and the timing or change at the same time as the change. It may be the timing immediately after, or the end timing of the changed variable display. In this case, the monochrome effect can be executed when the number of reserved memories is "3" or more, and the timing after the display mode changes after the hold display is shifted twice is determined as the end timing of the monochrome effect. Just do it. Specifically, in the monochrome effect setting process of FIG. 10-25, when determining whether or not the monochrome effect is effective on the condition that the number of reserved memories is "3" or more and executing the monochrome effect, the monochrome effect is used. Count the number of times the hold has shifted since the start of execution. Then, when the count value is "2" or more, it is assumed that the end condition of the monochrome effect is satisfied, and the timing at which the display mode of the hold display after that is changed may be determined as the end timing of the monochrome effect. According to this, although it is a condition for ending the monochrome effect that the display mode is changed, the viewing period of the monochrome effect can be secured, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the display mode of the active display always changes when the monochrome effect is executed, but this is an example. Even when the monochrome effect is executed, the display mode of the active display may not change (that is, the decision to execute the monochrome effect may be made when the display mode of the active display does not change. ). In this case, the monochrome effect may be terminated by the end of the variable display corresponding to the hold that was the target when the monochrome effect was determined to be executed.

(Explanation of feature section 153SG)
Next, the game machine in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-30 to 10-44.

FIG. 10-30 is a part of the flowchart of the effect control process process (S76) in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment. In the effect control process process in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, after the pre-reading notice setting process (S161) shown in FIG. 7 is executed, the first reserved storage display area 153SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 153SG005U (FIG. 10-). 42) The display mode and the number of display of the hold memory display are updated according to the start winning command buffer 153SG194A. After executing the hold display update process, any of S170 to S177 shown in FIG. Is supposed to be executed. The start winning command buffer 153SG194A corresponds to the first starting winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer in the feature unit 074AK (see FIG. 10-7), and is used in the starting winning command buffer 153SG194A. Is the storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage, and the variable display. A storage area corresponding to the first special figure (the area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0" and corresponding to the active display) is provided. In addition, the start winning command buffer 153SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure during variable display (the area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0” and corresponding to the active display) are provided.

FIG. 10-31 is a flowchart showing a lookahead advance notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 10-30. In the lookahead advance notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A (153SGS241), and determines whether or not there is an entry for which the hold display flag is not set (153SGS242). If there is no entry for which the hold display flag is not set, the lookahead advance notice setting process is terminated. If there is an entry for which the hold display flag is not set, the value of the hold display flag is already set to one of 1 to 4. It is determined whether or not there is an entry set (153SGS243).

If there is already an entry in which the value of the hold display flag is set to any of 1 to 4, that is, if the hold display notice effect has already been executed, the hold display flag is set in the entry (153SGS242). Set the hold display flag of (entry determined not to be present) to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the hold display notice effect (that is, it is decided to display the hold storage display corresponding to the entry with "○"). The pre-reading notice setting process is terminated (153SGS251). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry in which the value of the hold display flag is already set to any of 1 to 4 is the case where the hold display notice effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 153SGS243, if the hold display notice effect is already executed, the execution of the new hold display notice effect is restricted.

If there is no entry set in any of the values 1 to 4 of the hold display flag in 153SGS243, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the entry (in 153SGS242, the hold display flag is not set). ) Is determined whether or not the symbol designation command indicates a big hit (153SGS244). When the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a jackpot, the jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (153SGS245), and extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the hold display notice effect and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS245, by referring to the hold display notice effect determination table (not shown), the presence / absence of execution of the hold display notice effect and the hold display The display pattern when the advance notice effect is executed is determined (153SGS246).

In 153SG246, for example, whether or not to execute the hold display advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 10-32 (A). In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-32 (A), the presence / absence of the hold display advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the jackpot type specified in the processing of 153SGS245.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, four types of display patterns (notice types) of the hold display notice effect are provided: display pattern α, display pattern β, display pattern γ, and display pattern δ. Of these, when the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U in a white star shape (☆). When the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the hold storage display is displayed on the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U by the blue camera, and the hold display is displayed. When the display pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern δ, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U by the red camera. When it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold storage display is displayed in a white circle (◯) in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (A), when the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probability variable jackpot), non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 55%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 20%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%. Is decided, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is decided at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variation jackpot), non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Execution is decided, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 55%, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%, and execution is decided at a rate of 10%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

Returning to 153SGS244, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variation category from the variation category specification command of the entry (153SGS248) when the symbol designation command of the entry is a miss or a small hit, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the effect control. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the hold display notice effect extracted from the random counter of the counter setting unit 153SG193 and the big hit type specified in 153SGS249, refer to the hold display notice effect determination table at the time of small hit / miss (not shown). By doing so, it is determined whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and the display pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (B), when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is non-reach, the non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided at a rate of 5%, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 0%. The execution of the hold display notice effect is determined, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is out of order or small hit and the variable category is other (when the normal reach is off or small hit), it is decided that the hold display notice effect is not executed at a rate of 75%, and 20%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided at the ratio, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at the ratio of 5%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at the ratio of 0%. The execution of the effect is determined, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is Super Reach, it is decided that the hold display notice effect is not executed at a rate of 55%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%. Execution is decided, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 10%, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 5%, and execution is decided at a rate of 5%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (A) and 10-32 (B), in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is executed, the hold display notice effect is not executed. When the jackpot game state is controlled at a higher rate than when the hold display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β, the hold display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α. The jackpot type is set to be jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variation jackpot) at a high rate. With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the big hit type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. Is a probabilistic jackpot, and the player's expectation of becoming a probabilistic jackpot can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns that suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect described later, the degree of expectation that the display pattern α and the display pattern β are controlled to the big hit game state (big hit expectation) Is not set to be high, and the degree of expectation (probability variation big hit expectation) that the big hit type is big hit B or big hit C is the same.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the fluctuation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result is a big hit are the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach, and as shown in FIG. 10-32, the display pattern γ and The case where the display pattern δ is determined is the case where the variable display result is a big hit or the variable display result is out of order and the variable category is super reach. That is, it is also suggested that the hold storage display of the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (a mode of the blue or red camera) is a variable display of super reach that can execute the setting suggestion effect described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (B), when the fluctuation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the super reach. The hold memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Returning to FIG. 10-31, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the hold display advance notice effect is determined after the processing of the 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 is executed (153SGS250). If it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold display flag of the entry is set to a value (any of 1 to 4) corresponding to the display pattern determined by the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 and read ahead. The notice setting process is terminated (153SGS247). If it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold display flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the hold display notice effect, and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated ( 153SGS251).

10-33 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (153SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (153SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer (not shown) are set. Various command data and various flags stored in association with each other (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed) in the first to fourth first special figure hold storage The corresponding command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 153SGS271 (153SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273). When the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (153SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and when the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273; Y), the figure is shown. No start The various command data and various flags (that is, variable display is being displayed) stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of winning. Various command data and various flags corresponding to the second special symbol (various command data and various flags corresponding to the first to fourth second special symbol hold storage) are shifted upward by one buffer number. (153SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing the 153SGS272 or 153SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (153SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (153SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 153SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of the aligned decorative symbols (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111", "11", " It is determined from a combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbol) in which three symbols are aligned with "7" is determined as a stop symbol. To do. In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the chance eye indicating that it is a small hit as a stop symbol (third symbol is under a specific rule). It is determined from "334", "556", "778", etc.) that are not uniform. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (153SGS277). If the variable display variation pattern is not the super reach variation pattern, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. If the variable display variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern, the rear variable display suggestion effect is displayed during the variable display reach effect. Is executed (153SGS278), which determines whether or not to execute, and which effect is to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect. That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in 153SGS277 to 153SG278, the rear variable display suggestion effect (big hit suggestion effect or setting suggestion effect) is a variable pattern of the super reach variation with a long special figure variation time. It can be executed only on the display, and is not executed on the variable display of the normal reach and non-reach fluctuation patterns with a short special figure fluctuation time.

In the variable display of the super reach in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-41, the variable display result becomes a big hit as a suggestion effect during the front variable display from the start timing of the variable display. It is possible to execute a character effect suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5 or a timer effect suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit and a period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. , A setting that suggests a jackpot suggestion effect that suggests that the variable display result is a jackpot or a setting value that is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the reach effect that is the latter half of the variable display. Suggestive effects can be performed. That is, the process of 153SGS278 is a process of determining whether or not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect and whether to execute the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect during the reach effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect. ..

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the rear variable display suggestion effect (either the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect) is determined in the process of the 153SGS278 (153SGS279). If it is decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS278, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. The front variable display suggestion effect determination process for determining whether to execute the character effect or the timer effect as the variable display suggestion effect is executed (153SGS280). That is, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment does not determine the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect unless the execution of the rear variable display effect is determined, that is, the setting suggestion effect cannot be executed. In the variable display of reach and normal reach, the timer effect and the character effect are not executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display (153SGS281). When it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the period until the start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set in the timer for waiting for the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (as shown in FIG. 10-41 (A)). Set the value according to (5 seconds after the start of the reach effect) and proceed to 153SG285 (153SGS282). If it is decided to execute the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, wait for the suggestion effect start during the rear variable display. During variable display at the rear of the timer, the period until the start of the suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 10-41 (B), a value corresponding to the effect pattern of the timer effect (specifically, the effect pattern of the timer effect is the effect for 25 seconds). If the period is pattern TS-1, 5 seconds after the start of the reach effect, and if the timer effect pattern is the pattern TS-2, which is the effect period of 30 seconds, 10 seconds after the start of the reach effect). ) To proceed to 153SGS285 (153SGS283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the fluctuation pattern in the 153SGS285. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (153SGS286).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L and 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (153SGS287). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 153SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (153SGS288). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (153SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (153 SGS290).

FIG. 10-34 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect determination process (153SGS278) during the rear variable display in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-33. In the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process shown in FIGS. 9-34, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the value of the hold display flag corresponding to the variable display with reference to the start winning command buffer 153SG194A (153SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the hold display flag of the entry of "1-0" of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A is specified, and the second variable is displayed. When the display start command reception flag is set, the entry of "2-0" in the start winning command buffer 153SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect and the effect to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect based on the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 (153SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (A), when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "0", that is, the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, 90% of the respondents decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 10% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 0% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Set as a suggestion effect during variable display Determines to execute the suggestion effect. Further, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the hold storage display is displayed as a white square or star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. If so, the non-execution of the rear variable display suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 50%, the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 0%. Set as a suggestion effect during variable display at the rear Determines to execute the suggestion effect.

Further, when the value of the hold display flag specified in the 153 SGS 301 is "3", that is, when the hold storage display is displayed by the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, 30 %% Decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 35% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 35% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect. Then, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "4", that is, when the hold storage display is displayed by the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is 0. %% Decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 30% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 70% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Decide to execute the setting suggestion effect.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display, it is more than the case where the hold display notice effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Further, when the hold storage display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4"), It is higher than the case where the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "1" or "2"). It was set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display was determined by the ratio, and the hold memory display was displayed as a white square or star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case.

Also, pay attention to the case where the hold memory display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. The camera is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it is displayed, and the hold memory display is blue as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case where it is displayed in.

From the above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in a quadrangle or a star shape as a hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is used as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display. While it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, the hold memory display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. In that case, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of the setting suggestion effect being executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect is higher than the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the game is further played. It is possible to draw people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 10-34, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined in the process of the 153SGS 302 (153SGS303). If it is decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS302, the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS302, further. , 153 SGS 302 determines whether or not the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (153SGS304).

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of the 153 SGS 302, the effect pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is performed. Finish (153SGS305).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the processing of the 153 SGS 305, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (B), a total of three effect patterns from pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3 are provided. Among these effect patterns, pattern AS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and pattern AS-2 is It is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the putter AS-3 has the highest ratio of the variable display result to a big hit. It is a production pattern (big hit expectation: high) that suggests that it is high.

Then, in the above-mentioned processing of 153SGS305, as shown in FIG. 10-36, when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the big hit suggestion effect at a rate of 10% as pattern AS-1. Is determined to be pattern AS-2 at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display in the processing of the 153SGS 302, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and sets a value (pachinko gaming machine 1) from the set value designation command received from the CPU 103. (Set value set in) is specified (153SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestion effect determination process during the rear variable display (153SGS307).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the 153SG 307, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (B), a total of five patterns from the pattern SS-1 to the pattern SS-5 are provided. Of these patterns SS-1 to pattern SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests that the set value may be an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 has an even number of set values (for example, 1, 3, 5). For example, the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility of 2, 4, 6), and the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the set value is equal to or higher than the intermediate setting (for example, 3 or 5) closer to the odd number. Suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

The patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), and therefore, any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting). It is said that the degree of expectation is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the set value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the set value 5 and It is said that the expectation of being 6 is high.

In the feature unit 153SG, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low settings and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high settings, but the set values 1 to 3 may be set as low settings and the set values 4 to 6 may be set as high settings. Then, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set with the setting values 1 and 2 being the low setting, the setting values 3 and 4 being the intermediate setting, and the setting values 5 and 6 being the high setting.

In the process of the above-mentioned 153SGS307, as shown in FIG. 10-37, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern at a ratio of 60% to the pattern SS-. Determined to be 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, pattern at a rate of 0% Decide on SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 60%, and 6 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 9% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 20 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 10% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 50%, and 10 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 20% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 30%, and 30 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 20% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 15 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 30% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 5% determines the pattern SS-5.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG, it is suggested that the set value is one of 1 to 4 by executing the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the set value suggestion is made. It is suggested that the set value is 5 or 6 by executing the effect in the pattern SS-3 or the pattern SS-4. Then, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, it is confirmed that the set value is 6.

FIG. 10-38 is a flowchart showing a front variable display suggestion effect determination process (153SGS280) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 10-33. In the front variable display suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-38, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result of the variable display (153SGS311). In addition, it is determined whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (153SGS312).

If it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, whether or not the front variable display suggestion effect is executed and the suggestion during the front variable display based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect and the variable display result. The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 40%, and a rate of 30%. Determines the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is out of order, 70% of the time, 70% of the time, the non-execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is decided, and 25% of the time, the character effect is decided as the front variable display, the suggestion effect. Then, at a rate of 5%, the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

In other words, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. The execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and if the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the character effect and the execution of the timer effect are determined at the same ratio as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, while the variable display result. If is off, the execution of the character effect is determined at a higher rate than the execution of the timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display, that is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect. It is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect and executes the front variable display suggestion effect based on the variable display result. The presence / absence and the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the variable front display are determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS314). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (B), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and the rate is 0%. Determines the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and determines the execution of the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 70%. If the variable display result is out of alignment, 80% of the time, 80% of the time, the non-execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is decided, and 0% of the time, the character effect is decided as the front variable display, the suggestion effect. Then, at a rate of 20%, the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

That is, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and the execution of the character effect is not determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. That is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order as a result. When a timer effect is executed as an effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-38, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined after the execution of the 153 SGS 313 or the 153 SGS 314 (153 SGS 315). If it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the front part is further determined. It is determined whether or not the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the variable display (153SGS316).

If the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated. (153SGS317).

As a character effect effect pattern that can be determined in the process of 153 SGS317, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2, are provided. .. Among these effect patterns, pattern CS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 is the lowest. Yes, the pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) suggesting that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit by displaying the character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than that of the pattern CS-1. ).

Therefore, in the processing of the 153SGS317, as shown in FIG. 10-40 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect pattern of the character effect to the pattern CS-1 at a rate of 20%. The pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined to be pattern CS-1 at a rate of 80%, and to pattern CS-2 at a rate of 20%.

Further, when the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. Is determined and stored, and the suggestion effect determination process during the variable display of the unit is terminated (153SGS318).

As a timer effect effect pattern that can be determined in the processing of the 153 SGS 318, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided. Among these effect patterns, pattern TS-1 suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit in the image display device 5 is higher than that of the character effect pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 (big hit expectation: high). ) And the effect that suggests the period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display for 25 seconds together with the image of the character X. The pattern TS-2 is the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a big hit in the image display device 5. Is higher than the pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2 of the character effect (big hit expectation: high), and the period until the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is started for 25 seconds together with the image of the character Y. (See FIGS. 10-40 (C), 10-42 (D), and 10-42 (E)).

Therefore, in the processing of the 153SGS318, as shown in FIG. 10-40 (B), when the rear variable display suggestion effect whose execution is determined is the jackpot suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 produces a timer effect. The pattern is determined to be pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and to pattern TS-2 at a rate of 20%. Further, when the rear variable display suggestion effect whose execution is determined is the setting suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern TS- at a rate of 20%. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 rather than in the pattern TS-1 (that is, the timer). When the effect period of the effect is long and the character B is displayed on the image display device 5 rather than the character A), the rate at which the set suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the player can pay attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5. Further, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, it is possible to expect the player to execute the setting suggestion effect as compared with the case where the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (D), when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect, the front variable display suggestion effect is performed. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the character effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. The production is to be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 to 10-41, when the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect during the variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 is determined in the variable display effect process (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestion effect during the front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the subsequent variable display effect process (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the rear variable display suggestion effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the variable display process is executed. Then, based on the value of the timer for waiting for the suggestion effect during the rear variable display to become 0, the process data corresponding to the determined effect pattern of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set. Then, in the subsequent variable display effect processing (S172), the effect device may be controlled according to the contents of the process data according to the process timer.

As shown in FIGS. 10-41 (A) and 10-41 (B), the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect in the feature unit 153SG are during the execution period of the reach effect. In, it is executed for 7 seconds, which is a period longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, even if the player takes his eyes off the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect.

Next, the effect mode during the variable display in the feature unit 153SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-42 to 10-44. First, as shown in FIGS. 10-42 (A) and 10-42 (B), a new start prize is generated during the variable display, and the hold memory display is displayed as a look-ahead notice effect based on the start prize. When the pattern is determined to be the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, a new hold storage display is displayed in the mode of a blue or red camera in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D and the second hold storage display area 153SG005U. ..

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-42 (C) to 10-42 (E), as a new variable display, when the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display, which is the mode of the camera, is started, the front part The timer effect as a suggestion effect is started during the variable display. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-1, the image 153SG005X of the character X is displayed on the left side of the image display device 5 and the rear part is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-42 (D). During the variable display, the timer update display for 25 seconds, which is the period until the suggestion effect, is started. Further, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. 10-42 (E), the image 153SG005Y of the character Y is displayed on the left portion of the image display device 5, and the rear portion is variable. The update display of the timer for 30 seconds, which is the period until the suggestion effect during display, is started.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 10-43 (F) to 10-43 (H), when the variable display progresses together with the update display of the timer up to the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the super reach effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds during the execution of the super reach effect (the timer effect ends), the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect is started as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Specifically, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 10-43 (I). A message indicating that the jackpot expectation is low, such as "chance!", Is displayed on the image display device 5, and if the determined production pattern is pattern AS-2, it is shown in FIG. 10-43 (J). As described above, if a message indicating that the jackpot expectation such as “hot!” Is higher than that of the pattern AS-1 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the determined effect pattern is the pattern AS-3, FIG. As shown in −43 (K), a message indicating that the jackpot expectation such as “super hot!” Is higher than that of the pattern AS-2 is displayed on the image display device 5.

On the other hand, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect is as shown in FIGS. 10-44 (L) to 10-44 (P). In the case of the pattern SS-1 to the pattern SS-4, the image display device 5 displays the setting value suggestion images 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG005J, and 131SG005K of different characters, so that the pachinko machine 1 is set. The setting value is suggested. Further, when the effect pattern of the set value suggestion effect is the pattern SS-5, the set value suggestion image 131SGS005L, which is a collection of all the characters displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to the pattern SS-4, is the image display device. It is displayed at 5.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice, the look-ahead notice is not executed or the hold memory display is displayed. The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when is displayed as a white square or a star. For this reason, the player suggests the setting by a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, which is possessed in anticipation that the setting suggestion effect will be executed in advance when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera. You can now be ready to shoot the production. That is, the hold memory display of the aspect of the blue or red camera in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment is also an effect of urging the player to prepare for shooting the setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect and a timer effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the character effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display that suggests the expectation of a big hit. As shown in −39 (D), when the timer effect is executed during the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed during the variable display. Will be executed. That is, when the timer effect is executed, the player pays more attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit because the jackpot expectation is higher than when the character effect is executed. The setting suggestion effect is executed while the player is paying attention, and the player can prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked.

Further, as the front variable display suggestion effect during variable display, in addition to the character effect, a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the rear variable display suggestion effect can be executed, so that the setting suggestion effect can be performed. By executing the setting suggestion effect, the player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggestion effect.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as a timer effect, the period until the execution start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is displayed as a numerical value (see FIGS. 10-42 (D) and 10-42 (E)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timer effect, for example, it is suggested that the rear variable display is performed by displaying an increase / decrease of a gauge, a meter, or the like. It is possible not to clearly notify the period until the start of execution of the effect (suggest only the approximate period).

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-42 (D) and 10-42 (E), an embodiment in which the timer effect is executed by displaying an image on the image display device 5 is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and the display means other than the image display device 5. Any one aspect of the display in (1) or a plurality of aspects may be combined and executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-43 (H) and 10-44 (L), the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect is 0. Based on this, a jackpot suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. That is, even when the timer effect is executed, the jackpot suggestion effect may be executed instead of the setting suggestion effect, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game entertainment can be improved.

In addition, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 becomes 0 as the timer effect, the setting suggestion effect and the jackpot suggestion effect are performed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. An embodiment in which only one of them can be executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect becomes 0. , Both the setting suggestion performance and the jackpot suggestion production may be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Further, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the rear variable display suggestion effect is always executed when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and there may be a case where the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect but the rear variable display suggestion effect is not executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-40 (B) and 10-40 (C), as the effect pattern of the timer effect, the pattern TS-1 having an effect period of 25 seconds and the pattern having an effect period of 30 seconds TS-2 is provided, and when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. That is, it is suggested that when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion effect is executed for a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-41, since the rear variable display suggestion effect including the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half period in the variable display of the super reach, the player sets suggestion effect. Can be further prevented from being overlooked.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half period in the variable display of the super reach, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, there may be a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first half period in the variable display of the super reach.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-31 and 10-35, as a pre-reading notice, the display mode of the hold storage display is changed to a white square or star shape, or a blue or red camera. In the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display (the value of the hold display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera whose display mode is blue or red, it is possible to execute the hold display notice effect that can be displayed by the mode or the like. It is possible to determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display (the value of the hold display flag is 1 or 2) whose display mode is a white square or a star. Therefore, in the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display (the value of the hold display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera whose display mode is blue or red, the player decides whether or not the variable display result is a big hit. Since the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-42 and 10-44, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment corresponds to the hold storage display which is the target of the hold display notice effect when the hold display notice effect is executed. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in the variable display (variable display immediately after the hold display notice effect is finished). For this reason, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display, which is the target of the hold display notice effect, so that the player can miss the setting suggestion effect. It can be further prevented.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the hold display notice effect can be executed as a look-ahead notice is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display notice is given as a look-ahead notice. It may be possible to execute an effect other than the effect, and suggest that the setting suggestion effect is executed as the effect mode of the effect.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display which is the target of the hold display notice effect (variable display immediately after the hold display notice effect is finished). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is more than the start of the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display which is the target of the hold display notice effect during the execution period of the hold display notice effect. It may be possible to execute the setting suggestion effect from the previous timing).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-32, the ratio of displaying the hold memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice effect is such that the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star as the look-ahead notice effect. Since it is set lower than the display ratio, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, so that the hold memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. It is possible to draw attention to the person and further prevent the technician from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of displaying the hold memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice effect is the ratio of displaying the hold memory display as the look-ahead notice effect in a white square or star shape. Although the embodiment set to be lower than the display ratio in is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading notice effect. The ratio may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the hold memory display in a white square or star shape as a look-ahead notice effect, or the hold memory display may be set as a look-ahead notice effect of a blue or red camera. The ratio of displaying in the mode and the ratio of displaying the hold memory display as a white square or star as a pre-reading notice effect may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as a hold display notice effect, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera to prepare the player for shooting the setting suggestion effect. Since the player can prepare a form terminal such as a smartphone before the start of the setting suggestion effect, the success rate of shooting the setting suggestion effect by the player can be increased.

In addition, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as a hold display notice effect, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera to prepare the player for shooting the setting suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the hold storage display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a hold display notice effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are used. The player may be separately urged to prepare for shooting the setting suggestion effect by the sound output of the above, the display of the message image on the image display device 5, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the hold display notice effect is provided by the display pattern γ that displays the hold memory display in the form of a blue camera and the display pattern δ that displays the hold memory display in the form of a red camera. It is feasible, and as shown in FIG. 10-35 (A), when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera (when the value of the hold display flag is 3), the hold memory display is red. The rate at which the setting suggestion effect is executed is different from the case where the display is performed in the mode of the camera (when the value of the hold display flag is 4). In particular, when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the red camera, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera. When the display is displayed in the mode of the red camera, the player pays more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed than when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the hold memory display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display starts. Although the embodiment in which the mode does not change has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a case may be provided in which the display mode of the hold memory display changes from the mode of the blue camera to the mode of the red camera. In addition, a case is provided in which the hold storage display corresponding to the variable display during execution is continuously displayed as the active display, and the display mode of the active display is changed from the mode of the blue camera to the mode of the red camera. You may. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention as to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed until the variable display is completed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-33, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is only in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach having a long special figure fluctuation time. Since it is feasible and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time, it is suppressed that the setting suggestion effect is executed during the short variable display period, and the game It is possible to prevent the person from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-41, since the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is set to 7 seconds, which is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, the super reach is variably displayed (reach effect). It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect during (during execution).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-32, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is a super reach capable of executing the setting suggestion effect. Since it is suggested that the display is variable, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed by displaying the hold memory display in the form of a blue or red camera. Can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-32, when the fluctuation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the super reach, the hold display is displayed. Since the hold memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a notice effect, the player was paying attention to the fact that the hold memory display was displayed in the form of a blue or red camera. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being not executed and the interest from being lowered because the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is a variable display such as non-reach or normal reach.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 to 10-41, during the variable display of the super reach, the suggestion effect during the front variable display including the timer effect can be executed, but it is more special than the variable display of the super reach. Figure The timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach with a short fluctuation time, so the timer effect is not executed during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect. The timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach. It is possible to prevent inconsistency in the production due to the execution of.

(Modification example of feature part 153SG)
Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (D), when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect, the front variable display suggestion effect is used. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the character effect is executed, and the suggestion effect is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 10-45 as a modified example 153SG-1, execution of a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display. Is set lower than the ratio for determining the execution of the character effect as the front variable display suggestion effect, and the front variable when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. It may be set to execute the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the display suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as a pre-reading notice, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D and the second hold storage display area 153SG005U of the image display device 5 in a white square, star shape, or blue. Although a mode in which a hold display notice effect to be displayed in the mode of a red camera or a red camera can be executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. 10-46 (A) and FIG. As shown in FIG. 10-46 (B), when the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U, the image display device 5 displays the first hold storage display area 153SG005D. When the predetermined effect image 153SG005E overlaps with the second hold storage display area 153SG005U, at least the hold storage display in the form of a blue or red camera is displayed with priority over the effect image 153SG005E (blue or red camera). (Display so that the hold storage display of the embodiment is not concealed by the effect image 153SG005E). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the hold storage display of the blue or red camera mode due to the obstruction of the hold memory display of the blue or red camera mode by the effect image 153SG005E. be able to.

Further, the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment illustrates a mode in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds only during the variable display of the super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 153SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 10-47 (A) and 10-47 (B), the setting suggestion effect can be executed for 7 seconds during the variable display of normal reach and non-reach without shortening. May be good. Further, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, the period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-47 (C), is the special figure variation time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach. The setting suggestion effect may be executed for 3 seconds (3 seconds shorter than 3.75 seconds to 5.75 seconds).

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-35 (A), the hold storage display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera and the mode of the red camera as the hold display notice effect. Although the embodiment in which the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different from that in the case of being displayed in is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 153SG-4, the mode of the camera in which the hold memory display is blue. The determination ratio of at least one effect pattern in the setting suggestion effect may be different depending on whether it is displayed in the mode of the red camera or in the mode of the red camera. By doing so, the player can pay attention to whether the hold storage display is displayed in the form of the blue camera or the mode of the red camera as the hold display notice effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, two timings (25 seconds and 30 seconds after the start of the variable display) are provided as start timings of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the variable display of the super reach. Although the embodiment in which the setting suggestion effect is more easily executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect by executing the rear variable display suggestion effect from the timing, the present invention is not limited to this, and the modified example 153SG- As a value 5, when the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is patterned at a higher rate than when the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 25 seconds after the start of the variable display. It may be executed with an effect pattern suggesting a high set value such as SS-3 to pattern SS-5. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed according to the effect executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display and the display mode of the hold memory display displayed as the hold display notice effect. Although a form suggesting whether or not to be performed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed as an effect executed as a suggestion effect during front variable display and a hold display notice effect. It may be suggested whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed only by one of the display mode of the hold storage display. Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed as the rear variable display inducing effect is illustrated in the variable display in which the timer effect as the front variable display suggestion effect is executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result of the variable display for executing the timer effect is a big hit, the setting suggestion effect is set during the big hit game (advantageous state in the present invention) based on the variable display. May be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is already executed, the mode of restricting the execution of the new hold display notice effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the hold display notice effect is already executed, the execution of only a part of the new hold display notice effects may be restricted. For example, if the hold display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), a new hold display notice effect is displayed. Only what is executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β (the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star) is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of hold display notice effects having different suggested contents. Further, when the hold display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ in this way, it is restricted that the new hold display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β. Therefore, the player can pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. In addition, if the hold display notice effect has already been executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β (when the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star), a new hold display notice effect is displayed. Whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit by limiting only what is executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (the hold memory display is displayed in the manner of a blue or red camera) The player can be even more noticed.

The feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the hold display advance notice effect can be executed as the look-ahead effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead effect is not limited thereto. As long as the effect can be executed from the timing before the variable display of the target starts, the effect other than the hold display notice effect may be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a character effect and a timer effect can be executed as a suggestion effect during the front variable display suggesting that the variable display result is a big hit has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, an effect other than the character effect or the timer effect may be executed as long as the effect suggests that the variable display result is a big hit.

(Explanation related to association of feature parts)
The configuration relating to the feature portion 074AK, the configuration relating to the feature portion 075AK, and the configuration relating to the feature portion 153SG may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the configurations relating to the other feature portions, respectively. For example, in the feature unit 074AK and the feature unit 075AK, when the display mode is changed to a display mode with a high expectation of a big hit in the change effect during the monochrome effect, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect is set to be high as in the feature unit 153SG. May be good. According to this, since the effect of being controlled to a relatively advantageous state is executed, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the subsequent development, so that the setting by the player is performed. It is possible to prevent overlooking the suggestion effect.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 5 ... Image display device 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 100 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can control a plurality of advantageous states including a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
The variable display is executed in a period including at least a first period from the end of the advantageous state to the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times and a second period after the variable display of the predetermined number of times is executed. A game state control means that can control a special state with a higher frequency than the normal state,
When executing the variable display, one variable display period is determined from a plurality of different variable display periods including the first variable display period and the second variable display period which is a period longer than the first variable display period. Variable display period determination means and
Execution of the notification effect that can be executed at least at a plurality of different timings including the first timing during the variable display and the second timing after the first timing, for notifying that the second advantageous state is controlled. Means and
With
The notification effect executing means has a higher ratio when the variable display executed based on being controlled to the second advantageous state is executed in the first period than when it is executed in the second period. When the variable display executed based on the fact that the notification effect can be executed at the first timing and is controlled to the second advantageous state is executed in the second period, the first period It is possible to execute the notification effect at the second timing at a higher rate than when it is executed in.
The variable display period determining means is higher when the variable display executed based on being controlled in the second advantageous state is executed in the first period than when it is executed in the second period. The second variable display period can be determined by a ratio, and when the variable display executed based on the control of the second advantageous state is executed in the second period, in the first period. The first variable display period can be determined at a higher rate than when it is being executed.
further,
Specific display means that can display specific display related to variable display on display means,
A change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that changes the display color of the specific display is provided.
The display color of the specific display differs depending on the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state.
There are a normal effect state and a specific effect state in which a transition from the normal effect state can be performed and the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal effect state.
The specific effect state is an effect state in which at least a part of the colors of the display target including the specific display displayed by the display means is displayed less than the normal effect state.
When the change effect is executed by the change effect execution means in the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is changed to a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state. When the change effect is executed by the change effect means in the specific effect state, a common display color is used without changing the display color of the specific display regardless of the degree of expectation controlled by the advantageous state. age,
When shifting from the specific effect state to the normal effect state, the display color of the specific display is displayed in a display color according to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state.
A game machine characterized by that.